2006 accord coupe online reference owner's...

2006 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................3

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................53Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................105How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................183What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................197The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................219 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................263This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................287ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................301A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................305How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

This owner’s manual should beconsidered a permanent part of thevehicle and should remain with thevehicle when it is sold.

The information and specificationsincluded in this publication were ineffect at the time of approval forprinting. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specificationsor design at any time without noticeand without incurring any obligationwhatsoever.

This owner’s manual covers allmodels of the Accord Coupe. Youmay find descriptions of equipmentand features that are not on yourparticular model.

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

０５／０７／２７　１５：２６：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０００１　

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product containsor emits chemicals known to thestate of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as event data recordersor sensing and diagnostic modules.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and willbe pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

０５／０７／２７　１５：２６：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０００２　

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

These signal words mean:

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０５／０７／２７　１５：２６：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０００３　

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your

Vehicle

ataG

lance

3

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRROR CONTROLS

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONMANUAL TRANSMISSION

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

DRIVER’S FRONTAIRBAG

(P.63)

CLOCK

(P.55,56)

FRONT PASSENGER’SAIRBAG (P.9, 23)

(P.100)

(P.91)

(P.77)

(P.95)

(P.9, 23)

A/T model is shown.

(P.124)(P.173)

(P.108)

(P.113, 117)

(P.203)(P.200)

(P.186)

(P.81)

FUEL FILL DOOR(P.185)/TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

０５／０７／２７　１５：２７：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０００６　

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.If equipped.To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.

3 :

1 :2 :

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

HAZARDWARNINGBUTTON

PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

(P.68)

(P.29)

(P.71)

(P.72)HORN

TILT/TELESCOPICADJUSTMENT(P.73)

(P.90)SEAT HEATERS

VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES

(P.69)

(P.94)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

MOONROOF SWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS(P.71)

CRUISECONTROLS

(P.171)

(P.175)

EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST OFF SWITCH(P.212)

1

2

3

2

2

０５／０７／２７　１５：２７：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０００７　

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 15.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15

...Additional Safety Precautions . 16Additional Information About

.......................Your Seat Belts . 17..Seat Belt System Components . 17

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 18Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 19...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 19

Additional Information About...........................Your Airbags . 21

......Airbag System Components . 21......... 23

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 28..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 29

.............................Airbag Service . 30...Additional Safety Precautions . 31

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 32

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 32

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 33

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 33

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 35

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 35

...Additional Safety Precautions . 36Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 37.......................Protecting Infants . 37

.........Protecting Small Children . 38.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39....................Installing a Child Seat . 40

...............................With LATCH . 41.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 43

..............................With a Tether . 45...........Protecting Larger Children . 46

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 46..................Using a Booster Seat . 47

..When Can a Child Sit in Front . 48...Additional Safety Precautions . 49

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 50...................................Safety Labels . 51

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

5

０５／０７／２７　１５：２７：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０００８　

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages ).

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

14

32 49

221

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Don’t Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

6

０５／０７／２７　１５：２７：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０００９　

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

7

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)(7)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)

(9)

(6)

(9)(6)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners

０５／０７／２７　１５：２７：４４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１０　

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.In addition, most states and all

Canadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Your seat belt system alsoincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.


Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

Why Wear Seat Belts

8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０５／０７／２７　１５：２７：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１１　

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle has side airbags to helpprotect the upper torso of the driveror a front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact (seepage for more information on howyour side airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact (see page formore information on how your sidecurtain airbags work).

2628

23


Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

０５／０７／２７　１５：２８：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１２　

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.


Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

10

０５／０７／２７　１５：２８：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１３　

－

CONTINUED

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.

See pages guidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

Your vehicle has a door andtrunk open monitor on theinstrument panel to indicate

when a specific door or the trunk isnot tightly closed.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how the doorand trunk open monitor works.

32 39 for important

7761

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction Adjust the Front Seats

Close and Lock the Doors1.

2.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

０５／０７／２７　１５：２８：３０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１４　

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel in and out (see page

). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

7382


Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０５／０７／２７　１５：２８：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１５　

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See pages and for how toadjust the seat-backs.

8482

87


Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

13

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０５／０７／２７　１５：２８：５０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１６　

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bones

take the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

This spreads the force of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

17

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

14

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０５／０７／２７　１５：２９：０１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１７　

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

CONTINUED


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

Advice for Pregnant Women6.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

15

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０５／０７／２７　１５：２９：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１８　

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.


Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Additional Safety Precautions

16

０５／０７／２７　１５：２９：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００１９　

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts.If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before your seatbelt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator willstop flashing but remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger’s seat, or a small child isriding there, the indicator will notcome on and the beeper will notsound.

If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.

The seat belts use the samemonitoring system as the frontairbags. The system may not workproperly under these conditions:

Placing heavy items on the frontpassenger’s seat.

The front passenger is not sittingproperly.

The front passenger’s seat-back ispressed forward by a folded-downrear seat.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer if the indicator comes on orthe beeper sounds when there is nofront passenger or objects on thefront seat.

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

17

０５／０７／２７　１５：２９：３２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２０　

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage )

14

43


Lap/Shoulder Belt

18

０５／０７／２７　１５：２９：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２１　

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions,and they should activate in anycollision severe enough to causefront airbag inflation.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. Any belt thatis not in good condition or workingproperly may not provide adequateprotection and should be replaced assoon as possible.

do not deploy

Honda Warranty Information

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

19

０５／０７／２７　１５：２９：５０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２２　

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page. 251


20

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０５／０７／２７　１５：２９：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２３　

Your airbag system includes:

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see pag e ).

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see pag e ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).28

23

26

CONTINUED

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

21

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(7)(10)

(11)(9)

(6)

(4)

(7)

(8)

(10)(5)

(12)

(14)

(13)

(14)(13)

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags

(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(14) Side Curtain Airbags

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)

０５／０７／２７　１５：３０：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２４　

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and automatically turnthe airbag off (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. These automatically turn offthe passenger’s front airbag ifthey detect an infant or a smallchild may be in the seat (see page

).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page ).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

19

29

25

29

29

25

28


22

０５／０７／２７　１５：３０：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２５　

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed. 25

CONTINUED

How Your Front Airbags Work


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

０５／０７／２７　１５：３０：２９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２６　

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe


24

０５／０７／２７　１５：３０：３８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２７　

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Hondadoes not encourage carrying aninfant or small child in the front, ifthe sensors detect the weight of aninfant or small child, the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.

CONTINUED

Advanced Airbags


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

０５／０７／２７　１５：３０：５１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２８　

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.

Moving the front seat forciblyback on the folded rear seat.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Also, make sure the floor matbehind the front passenger’s seatis hooked to the floor mat anchor(see page ). If it is not, the matmay interfere with the properoperation of the sensors andoperation of the seat.

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

Folding the rear seat-back onto areclined front passenger’s seat-back.

29

251

How Your Side Airbags Work


do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

26

０５／０７／２７　１５：３１：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００２９　

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans into the sideairbag’s path.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

29Side Airbag Cutoff System


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

27

０５／０７／２７　１５：３１：１４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３０　

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on for several seconds thengoes off. This tells you the system isworking properly.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works


28

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０５／０７／２７　１５：３１：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３１　

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work when you need them.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on for several secondsand then go off (see page ). If itdoesn’t come on, stays on, or comeson while driving without a passengerin the front seat, have the systemchecked.

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child on the front passenger’sseat. It does mean there is aproblem with the airbag.

58

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

not


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

U.S. Canada

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U.S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３１：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３２　

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor, the frontpassenger’s weight sensors, thefront seat belt tensioners, and allseat belts worn during the crash tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in the backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, have the passengersit upright and wear the seat beltproperly.

If the indicator comes on with nopassenger in the front, or with anadult in the seat, there may be aproblem with the advanced airbagsystem. Have the vehicle checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Airbag Service The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

An airbag ever inflates.


30

０５／０７／２７　１５：３１：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３３　

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

If water or another liquidsoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag cutoffsystem from working properly.

This will cause thefront passenger’s weight sensorsto work improperly. The systemmay shut off the front passenger’sairbag and the passenger airbagoff indicator will come on. Theseat belt reminder indicator for afront seat passenger may alsowork improperly.

Make sure that the folded-downrear seat does not press the frontpassenger’s seat-back. Check thepassenger airbag off indicator toconfirm that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag is operatingproperly.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto liquid.

Do not recline the front passenger’sseat-back as far to the rear aspossible with the right rear seatfolded down.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

０５／０７／２７　１５：３１：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３４　

－－

－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

37 4546 49

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

32

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３２：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３５　

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ),please follow these guidelines:

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in a back seat.Some states have laws restrictingwhere children may ride.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

29

46

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Infants

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

０５／０７／２７　１５：３２：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３６　

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

Canadian Models

U.S. Models


34

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

０５／０７／２７　１５：３２：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３７　

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visualcontact, we strongly recommendthat another adult ride with thechild in the back seat. The backseat is far safer for a child than thefront.

15

14

46

82

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

０５／０７／２７　１５：３２：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３８　

－


If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

81


Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock both doors and the trunkwhen your vehicle is not in use.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.


36

０５／０７／２７　１５：３２：５４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００３９　

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

０５／０７／２７　１５：３３：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４０　

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

In any situation, we stronglyrecommend that you install the childseat directly behind the frontpassenger’s seat, move the seat asfar forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

25

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

38

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３３：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４１　

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

1.

2.

41

CONTINUED

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３３：３０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４２　

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

40

０５／０７／２７　１５：３３：４２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４３　

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

Rigid typeLOWER ANCHORS

BUTTON

０５／０７／２７　１５：３３：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４４　

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Lift the head restraint (see page), then route the tether strap

through the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

4.

5.

6.

7.

87


42

Flexible type

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

０５／０７／２７　１５：３４：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４５　

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

０５／０７／２７　１５：３４：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４６　

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

5.4.


44

０５／０７／２７　１５：３４：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４７　

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using the anchoragepoints shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the seat-back.

Follow steps 2 and 3 from theprevious column.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.Lift the cover, then attach thetether strap hook to the anchor,making sure the strap is nottwisted.Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

43 43

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Using the Center AnchorUsing an Outer Anchor


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

ANCHOR

TETHERSTRAPHOOK

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHORTETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

COVER

０５／０７／２７　１５：３４：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４８　

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

46

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３４：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００４９　

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intend

to drive.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the boosterseat maker’s instructions.

3.

4.

5.39

Using a Booster Seat


Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

０５／０７／２７　１５：３４：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５０　

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

14 46

Maturity

Physical Size

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront


48

０５／０７／２７　１５：３５：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５１　

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.



Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

０５／０７／２７　１５：３５：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５２　

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the heating and cooling system/climate control system as shownbelow.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

50

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３５：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５３　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

4-cylinder LX models Except 4-cylinder LX models

Safety Labels

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

HOOD

DASHBOARD

RADIATOR CAP

０５／０７／２７　１５：３５：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５４　

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

52

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

０５／０７／２７　１５：３６：０２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５５　

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 54..............................Instument Panel . 55

...........Instument Panel Indicators . 57.............................................Gauges . 63

.....................................Odometer . 63...................................Trip Meter . 64..................................Fuel Gauge . 64

...................Temperature Gauge . 64Outside Temperature

...................................Indicator . 65..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65

......................Maintenance Minder . 66Controls Near the Steering

...........................................Wheel . 67.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 68

...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 69Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 70............Daytime Running Lights . 70

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71.................Hazard Warning Button . 71.................Rear Window Defogger . 72

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 73...............................Keys and Locks . 74

........................Immobilizer System . 75................................Ignition Switch . 76

..........................Power Door Locks . 77.......................Remote Transmitter . 78

................................................Trunk . 81........Emergency Trunk Opener . 81

.................................................Seats . 82..........Manual Seat Adjustments . 82

............Power Seat Adjustments . 84..........................Head Restraints . 87

.......................Folding Rear Seat . 88....................................Seat Heaters . 90

..............................Power Windows . 91.........................................Moonroof . 94

.............................................Mirrors . 95.................................Parking Brake . 96

...........Interior Convenience Items . 97....................................Glove Box . 98

.......................Beverage Holders . 98...............Console Compartment . 99

.......................Center CD Pocket . 99...............................Coin Pocket . 100

........Accessory Power Sockets . 100...................................Sun Visor . 101

............................Vanity Mirror . 101....................Sunglasses Holder . 102

..................................Coat Hook . 102...............................Interior Lights . 102

Instruments and Controls

Instruments

andC

ontrols

53

０５／０７／２７　１５：３６：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５６　

Control Locations

54

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORSGAUGES

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKETS

SEAT HEATERSWITCH

(P.63)

CLOCK

(P.55, 56)

(P.95)

(P.77)

(P.91)

(P.90)

(P.71)

(P.100)(P.186)

(P.124)

(P.173)

(P.108)

(P.113, 117)FUEL FILLDOOR(P.185)/TRUNKRELEASEHANDLE(P.81)

０５／０７／２７　１５：３６：１４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５７　

＊

＊

＊ If equipped.:

U.S. models

Instrument Panel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

55

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR

DOOR AND TRUNK OPENMONITOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTSINDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARDWARNING INDICATORS

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

CHARGINGSYSTEMINDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.57)

(P.59)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.60)

(P.57)

(P.57)

(P.59) (P.60)

(P.60)

(P.58) (P.60)

(P.58)

(P.61)

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR (P.58)

(P.57)

(P.61)

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR (P.61)

(P.59)

(P.62)

(P.62)

(P.62)

(P.62)

EX-V6 with A/T model is shown.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３６：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５８　

＊

＊

＊ If equipped.:

Canadian models

Instrument Panel

56

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARDWARNING INDICATORS

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

CHARGINGSYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.57)

(P. 59)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (p.60 )

( P.57)

(P.57)

(P.59) (P.60)

(P.60)

(P.58)

(P.62)

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.62)

(P.62)

(P.62)

(P.59)

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR (P.61)

DOOR AND TRUNK OPENMONITOR (P.61)

(P.57)

(P.58)

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR (P.60)

(P.61)

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P.60)

(P.58)

EX-V6 with A/T model is shown.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３６：３３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００５９　

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle. See page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.

This indicator reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page .17

277

276

276

Instrument Panel Indicators

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

57

０５／０７／２７　１５：３６：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６０　

This indicator has two functions:This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page .

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you try to drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or the front passenger’sweight sensors. For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

28

29

278

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator


58

U.S. Canada U.S. Canada

０５／０７／２７　１５：３６：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６１　

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willthen go off if you have inserted aproperly-coded ignition key. If it isnot a properly-coded key, theindicator will blink, and the enginewill not start (see page ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from the ON (II) position tothe ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK(0) position.

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicator does notblink or blinks rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsblink. All turn signals on the outsideof the vehicle should flash.

75249

209

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators


Instruments

andC

ontrols

59

０５／０７／２８　１７：０３：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６２　

This indicator is located in the fuelgauge. It comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

When the indicator comes on, thereare about 2.72 U.S. gal (10.3 ) offuel remaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicator(see page ).

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the high beam headlight’s circuit.Have your vehicle checked by yourdealer.

When the daytime running lights(DRL) are on, this indicator comeson with reduced brightness (seepage ).

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .69

70 238

Canadian models only


‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Low Fuel IndicatorLights On Indicator

Washer Level Indicator

High Beam Indicator

60

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

０５／０７／２７　１５：３７：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６３　

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. For moreinformation, see page .

The specific door indicator comes onin this monitor if either door is notfully closed.

The trunk indicator comes on whenthe trunk is opened or if it is not fullyclosed.

All the indicators in the monitorcome on for a few seconds when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

If the remaining engine oil life ismore than 16 percent, this indicatorcomes on for a few seconds whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance. Themaintenance main items and subitems will be displayed in theinformation display. See page formore information on themaintenance minder.

This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

174

221

Security System IndicatorMaintenance MinderIndicator

Door and Trunk Open Monitor


Instruments

andC

ontrols

61


０５／０７／２７　１５：３７：３３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６４　

On all V6 models On all V6 modelsThis indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page

for more information on theVSA system.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

1.

2.

3.

211

211

211

175

175


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

62

０５／０７／２７　１５：３７：４９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６５　

To switch the information displaybetween the odometer/trip meter,outside temperature/trip meter (ifequipped), and engine oil life andmaintenance item code(s), press theSelect/Reset knob repeatedly.

This shows the total distance yourvehicle has been driven. It measuresmiles in U.S. models and kilometersin Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, your lastselection appears in the display.

Gauges

Odometer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

SELECT/RESETKNOB

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

U.S. A/T model is shown.

ODOMETER/TRIP METER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR/CHECK FUEL CAPINDICATOR/MAINTENANCE MINDER

０５／０７／２７　１５：３７：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６６　

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise into theupper half of the gauge. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. See page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between them bypressing the Select/Reset knobrepeatedly. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.

274

Fuel Gauge Temperature GaugeTrip Meter

Gauges

64

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３８：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６７　

± ±

－－－－－－－－

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

When the temperature reaches thedesired value, release the Select/Reset knob. You should see the newoutside temperature displayed.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C inCanadian models) warmer or cooler.This indicator displays the outside

temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).

The sensor delays the indicatorupdate until it reaches the correctoutside temperature. This may takeseveral minutes.

Select the outside temperatureindicator, then press the Select/Reset knob for 10 seconds. Thefollowing sequence will appear for 1second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4,

3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).

If you fuel cap is loose or missing, a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ messageappears in the information displayafter you start the engine. Turn theengine off and confirm the fuel cap isinstalled. If it is, loosen the cap, thenretighten it until it clicks at leastonce. When you restart the engine,the message appears again. To clearthe message, press and release theSelect/Reset knob.

CONTINUED

On 4-cylinder EX-L and 6-cylinder EXmodels

Outside Temperature Indicator Check Fuel Cap Indicator

Gauges

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

０５／０７／２７　１５：３８：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６８　

The information display shows youthe engine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page formore information.

If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel fill cap, the malfunctionindicator lamp (MIL) comes on.Turn the engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL goesout after 3 days of normal drivingonce the cap is tightened or replaced.If it does not go out, have yourdealer inspect the vehicle. For moreinformation, see page .277

221

Gauges

Maintenance Minder

66

０５／０７／２７　１５：３８：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００６９　

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.If equipped.

1 :2 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments

andC

ontrols

67

EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.

CRUISE CONTROLSTILT/TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

AUDIO SYSTEM

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR(P.69)

HORN

MOONROOFSWITCH(P.94)

(P.73)

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS(P.71)

(P.68)(P.29)

(P.71)

(P.72)

SEAT HEATERS(P.90)

(P.171)

(P.212)

(P.124)

(P.175)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTOFF SWITCH

1

2

2

2

０５／０７／２７　１５：３８：３３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７０　

－－－

－

－

－

－－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers are not activated.

Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring.

If you turn it to the shortest delay,the wipers will change to lowspeed operation when the vehiclespeed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

While the vehicle is stopped and ingear, the wipers sweep thewindshield whenever you removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull thewiper control lever toward you, andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.

1.2.3.4.5.6

Windshield Wipers

OFF

LO

HI

Windshield WashersMIST

INT

Windshield Wipers and Washers

68

０５／０７／２７　１５：３８：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７１　

－

－

－

Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights, side-marker lights, and rear license platelights.

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turn signalOffParking and interior lightsHeadlightsHigh beamsFlash high beams

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

If you leave the lights on with thekey removed from the ignitionswitch, you will hear a reminderchime when you open the driver’sdoor.

Push the leverforward until you hear a click to turnon the high beams. The blue highbeam indicator will come on (seepage ). Pull the lever back toreturn to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

60

Headlights On

Turn Signal

High Beams

Turn Signal and Headlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

69

０５／０７／２７　１５：３８：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７２　

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open thedoor and get out, the lights willturn off after 10 minutes.

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, the lights on indicator comeson along with a lights-on reminderchime.

This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, side marker lights,taillights, and license plate lightsautomatically under theseconditions:

If you leave the headlight switch inthe or position, removethe key, then open and close thedriver’s door, the lights will turnoff after 15 seconds.

With the headlight switch OFF orposition, the high beam

headlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Automatic Lighting Off Feature Daytime Running Lights

Headlights

70

０５／０７／２７　１５：３９：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７３　

The Select/Reset knob on theinstrument panel controls thebrightness of the instrument panellights. Turn the knob to adjust thebrightness.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

The instrument panel will illuminatewith reduced brightness when youopen the driver’s door. Thebrightness will increase slightlywhen you insert the key in theignition switch, then go to normal

brightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If you do not insert the key in theignition switch after opening thedriver’s door, the illumination turnsoff about 30 seconds after you closethe door.

If you insert the key but do not turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, the illumination turns off inabout 10 seconds.

To reduce glare at night, the instru-ment panel illumination dims whenyou turn the light switch to or

. Turning the Select/Resetknob fully to the right until you heara click will cancel the reduced bright-ness.

Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

Instruments

andC

ontrols

71

SELECT/RESET KNOB

０５／０７／２７　１５：３９：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７４　

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove/in the button comes on toshow the defogger is on. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignitionswitch. You have to turn thedefogger on again when you restartthe vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe side-to-side.

Rear Window Defogger

72

Auto A/C type shown Vehicles with navigation systemManual A/C type shown

０５／０７／２７　１５：３９：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７５　

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown and in or out to the desiredposition. Make sure you can seethe instrument panel gauges andthe indicators.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments

andC

ontrols

73

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０５／０７／２７　１５：３９：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７６　

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the driver’sdoor lock. You can keep the trunkrelease handle, rear seat trunkaccess, and glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Keys and Locks

74

MASTERKEY WITHREMOTETRANSMITTER

VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)

KEYNUMBERTAG

０５／０７／２７　１５：３９：４２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７７　

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart your engine, contact yourdealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go out. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the key. Turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position,remove the key, reinsert it, and turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position again.

Immobilizer System

Instruments

andC

ontrols

75

０５／０７／２７　１５：３９：５２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７８　

－

－

－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, push it in slightly. Ifyour vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustalso be in park.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

76

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

０５／０７／２７　１５：４０：０２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００７９　

You can open or close the windowsby using the key in the driver’s door(see page ).

The lock tab on the passenger’s doorlocks and unlocks only that door.Pulling up on the driver’s door locktab only unlocks the driver’s door.

Pushing the bottom of either masterdoor lock switch unlocks both doors.

To lock the passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab down and close the door. Tolock the driver’s door, remove thekey from the ignition switch andpush the lock tab down or push thetop of the master switch, then closethe door.

To lock the doors, push the top ofthe master door lock switch oneither door, press the lock tab downon the driver’s door, or use the keyon the outside lock on the driver’sdoor. To unlock only the driver’s door

from the outside, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn it again, bothdoors unlock.

With the key in the ignition switch,you cannot lock the both doors fromthe outside by both master door lockswitches or the lock tab on thedriver’s door.

93

Lockout Prevention

Power Door Locks

Instruments

andC

ontrols

77

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH LOCK TAB

０５／０７／２７　１５：４０：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８０　

－

－

－

－

You can also open both powerwindows from outside the vehiclewith the remote transmitter (seepage ).

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the passenger’s door.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you push the button.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the door activatedposition) will come on when youpress the UNLOCK button. If you donot open either door within 30seconds, the lights fade out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the lights will go offimmediately.

Press this button once tolock both doors. Some exterior lightswill flash once.When you push the LOCK buttontwice within 5 seconds, the lights willflash and the horn will beep to verifythat the doors are locked and thatthe security system has set. TheLOCK button will not work this wayif either door is not fully closed.

When the key is in the ignitionswitch, the functions of each buttonis disabled.

Press thisbutton for about 1 second to openthe trunk.

Press and hold thisbutton for about 2 seconds to attractattention: the horn will sound andthe exterior lights will flash for about30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,press any other button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

If you do not open either door within30 seconds, the doors automaticallyrelock and the security system sets.

92

UNLOCK

LOCK

TRUNK RELEASE

PANIC

Remote Transmitter

78

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

０５／０７／２７　１５：４０：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８１　

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

To replace the battery:

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.Battery type: CR1616 Inside the transmitter, separate

the inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the TransmitterBattery

Remote Transmitter

Instruments

andC

ontrols

79

SCREWTAB

BATTERY

０５／０７／２７　１５：４０：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８２　

＋




Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

Install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.

Remote Transmitter

80

０５／０７／２７　１５：４０：４３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８３　

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thelid, and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key.

Give the person the valet key.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside. To open the trunk, push therelease lever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature. For more informationabout child safety, see page .

You can open the trunk in two ways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver’s seat.

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

1.

2.

50

36

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Emergency Trunk Opener

Trunk

Instruments

andC

ontrols

81

Pull

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

MASTERKEY

０５／０７／２７　１５：４０：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８４　

－

The 4-cylinder EX model has apower seat bottom heightadjustment. All other driver’s seatadjustments in this model aremanual.

The 4-cylinder LX model has manualdriver’s seat adjustments (see nextcolumn).

All V6 models and the 4-cylinderEX-L models have a poweradjustable driver’s seat.

The front passenger’s seat in allmodels adjusts manually.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seat, pull up on the lever on theoutside of the seat bottom.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

1311

Seats

Manual Seat Adjustments

82

０５／０７／２７　１５：４１：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８５　

The height of your driver’s seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.

Make sure to pull the lever upwardor downward to its full range.



The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push the lever downrepeatedly.

On 4-cylinder EX modelOn 4-cylinder LX model

Driver’s Seat Power HeightAdjustment

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

83

０５／０７／２７　１５：４１：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８６　

－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

11 13

On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinderEX-L model

Raises or lowers theseat.

Adjusts the seat-back angle forwardor backward.

Moves the front ofthe seat up or downand the rear of theseat up or down.

Moves the seatforward andbackward.

The controls for the poweradjustable driver’s seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the seat with the ignitionswitch in any position. Make all seatadjustments before you start driving.

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat-back angle.

Power Seat Adjustments

Seats

84

０５／０７／２７　１５：４１：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８７　

To use the console lid as an armrest,slide it to the desired position.

Make sure your passenger’s handsor fingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullthe release lever up on the side ofthe seat-back. The seat-back will tiltforward to allow easier entry to therear seat.

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

CONTINUED

On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 modelsOn all V6 models and the 4-cylinderEX-L model

Driver’s Lumbar Support Armrest Rear Seat AccessDriver’s Side

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

85

RELEASE LEVER

０５／０７／２７　１５：４１：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８８　

To get into the rear seat on thepassenger’s side, push downward onthe release lever at the base of theseat-back. The seat-back will tiltforward and the entire seat will moveforward to allow easier entry to therear seat.

To get into the rear seat on thedriver’s side, open the door and pullup on the seat-back adjustment lever.The seat-back will tilt forward toallow easier entry to the rear seat.

After a passenger gets into the rearseat, push the seat-back to theupright position and push the wholeseat backwards until it latches. Makesure the seat is fully latched beforesitting in it.

On LX and EX models

Passenger’s Side

Seats

86

SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER

RELEASE LEVER

To avoid damaging the seat-back angleadjustment motor, do not operate theseat-back angle switch when the seat-back is tilted f orward.

０５／０７／２７　１５：４１：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００８９　

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

13

The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways, and pushthe restraint down.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints on the front seats and onthe outer rear seats.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

Head Restraints

Seats

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

RELEASE BUTTON

FRONT REAR

RELEASE BUTTON

０５／０７／２７　１５：４２：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９０　

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.

The left and right seat-backs of therear seat can be folded separatelyfrom inside the vehicle or inside thetrunk.

To fold down the seat-back frominside the vehicle, insert the masterkey in the lock on the rear shelf. Tofold down the driver’s side, turn thekey clockwise, pull down the top ofthe seat-back, then release the key.To fold down the passenger’s side,turn the key counterclockwise andperform the same procedure.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

Folding Rear Seat

Seats

88

GUIDE

CENTERSHOULDER BELT

MASTER KEY

０５／０７／２７　１５：４２：１２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９１　

To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release under thetrunk panel. Push the seat-backdown, then let go of the release.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

Make sure that the folded seat-backdoes not interfere with the frontpassenger’s seat-back. This willcause the front passenger’s weightsensors to work improperly (seepage ). Also check the passengerairbag off indicator to assure properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back, and the center shoulder belt isre-positioned in the guide wheneverthe seat-back is in its upright position.Be sure the center shoulder belt isnot twisted.

50

25193

Seats

Carrying Cargo

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

Pull

０５／０７／２７　１５：４２：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９２　

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat temperature drops.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Both front seats have seat heaters.The passenger seat is only heated inthe seat bottom because of the sideairbag cutoff system. The ignitionswitch must be in the ON (II)position to use seat heaters. Push thetop of the switch, HI, to rapidly heatup the seat. After the seat reaches acomfortable temperature, select LOby pushing the bottom of the switch.This will keep the seat warm.

On EX-L and EX-V6 models

Seat Heaters

90

SEATHEATERSWITCH

０５／０７／２７　１５：４２：２９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９３　

－

CONTINUED

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower eitherwindow. To open the window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want thewindow to stop. Pull back on theswitch and hold it to close thewindow.

The windows operate for up to 10minutes after you turn off theignition switch. Opening either doorcancels this function.

If the MAIN switch is off, thepassenger’s windows cannot beraised or lowered. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe vehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

To open or close thedriver’s window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically godown or up all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.

Power Windows

AUTO

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91

MAIN SWITCH

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０５／０７／２７　１５：４２：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９４　

－ If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s door unlocks, andboth windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

You can open both windows from theoutside with the remote transmitter.

If the driver’swindow runs into any obstacle whileit is closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it. Pull and hold the driver’s window

switch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor about 2 seconds. To open the windows further,

press the button again (within 10seconds).

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

Power Windows

Opening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

AUTO REVERSE

92

０５／０７／２７　１５：４２：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９５　

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. Both windowsstart to close. To stop the windows,release the key.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

NOTE: If the windows stop beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

To open:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. Both windows start to open.To stop the windows, release thekey.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again (within10 seconds).

NOTE: If the windows stop beforethe desired position, repeat steps 2and 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Opening/Closing the Windowswith the Key

Power Windows

Instruments

andC

ontrols

93

Open

Close

UNLOCK BUTTON

０５／０７／２７　１５：４３：０１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９６　

The moonroof can be tilted up in theback for ventilation, or it can be slidback into the roof. Use the switchunder the left dashboard vent tooperate the moonroof. You mustturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position for the moonroof tooperate.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either door.

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center part of theswitch ( ). To close themoonroof, press and hold the upperpart of the switch ( ). To openthe moonroof, press and hold thelower part of the switch ( ).Release the switch when themoonroof gets to the desiredposition.

If equipped

Moonroof

94

MOONROOF SWITCH

Close

Tilt

MOONROOF SWITCHOpen

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

０５／０７／２７　１５：４３：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９７　

Push or pull the adjustment knobright, left, up, or down to move themirror.

When you finish, turn theadjustment knob to the center(off) position. This turns off theadjustment knob to keep yoursettings.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Turn the adjustment knob to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

3.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Instruments

andC

ontrols

95

ADJUSTMENT KNOB

TAB

０５／０７／２７　１５：４３：２２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９８　

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

If you drive without fully releasingthe parking brake, the beepersounds continuously.

58

If equipped

Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake

96

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axle.

０５／０７／２７　１５：４３：３０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　００９９　

Interior Convenience Items

Instruments

andC

ontrols

97

COIN POCKET

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

VANITY MIRROR

SUNGLASSESHOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDER SUN VISOR

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

BEVERAGE HOLDER

COAT HOOK

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

CENTER CD POCKET

０５／０７／２７　１５：４３：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１００　

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.

The center console has two beverageholders on the front. Your vehiclealso has beverage holders in thedoor pockets and the rear panels.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close thedoors. Use only resealablecontainers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Glove Box Beverage Holders


98

MASTER KEY

Lock

Unlock

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０５／０７／２７　１５：４３：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１０１　

To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever and lift thearmrest.

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

The tray in the console compartmenthas a coin holder.

To open the center CD pocket, pushdown on the center of the lid tounlatch it. It will swing openautomatically. To close it, push thelid down until it latches. This pocketcan store up to 12 CDs.

On vehicles without navigation system

Console Compartment Center CD Pocket


Instruments

andC

ontrols

99

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER

Push

０５／０７／２７　１５：４３：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１０２　

To open the coin pocket, push thetop of the lid. To close it, push the liddown until it latches. Thecompartment cannot be used as anashtray.

There are two accessory powersockets in your vehicle. One islocated at the right of the coinpocket, and the other is under thearmrest in the console compartmentstorage area.

To use an accessory power socket,push the top of the lid.

To use an accessory power socket,pull up the cover.

Coin Pocket Accessory Power Sockets


100

０５／０７／２７　１５：４４：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１０３　

In this position, the sun visor can beadjusted by moving it on its slider.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

Pull up the vanity mirror cover to useit. The lights beside the mirror comeon when you pull up the cover.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

To use an accessory power socket,the ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less(10 amps).

To use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.

Do not use the sun visor extensionover the inside mirror.

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror


Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

SUN VISOR

０５／０７／２７　１５：４４：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１０４　

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the rear edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items inthis holder. Make sure they aresmall enough to let the holder closeand latch, and that they are notheavy enough to cause the holder topop open while driving.

To use a coat hook, pull it down.Close it with a firm push.

Make sure the coat hook is closedwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch; ON, Door Activated (center),and OFF.

Sunglasses Holder Coat Hook Ceiling Light

Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights

102

COAT HOOK DOOR ACTIVATED

OFF

ON

０５／０７／２７　１５：４４：２９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１０５　

The front ceiling light has a two-position switch; Door Activated andOFF.

In the Door Activated position bothceiling lights, the light comes onwhen you:

Open either door.Unlock the driver’s door with themaster door lock switch, lock tab,key, or the remote transmitter.Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

After both doors are closed tightly,the light(s) dims slightly, then fadeout in about 30 seconds.

If you do not open either door afterunlocking the driver’s door orremoving the key from the ignitionswitch, the light(s) fades out inabout 30 seconds.

If you leave either door open withoutthe key is in the ignition switch, theceiling light(s) will go off after 3minutes.

Turn on a spotlight by pushing thelens. Push the lens again to turn itoff. You can use the spotlights at alltimes.

On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models

Interior Lights

Spotlights

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

DOORACTIVATED

OFF

LX and LX-V6 models

EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models

０５／０７／２７　１５：４４：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１０６　

The courtesy light in each doorcomes on when the door is opened,and goes out when the door is closed.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy lightin the ignition switch. This lightcomes on when you;

Open either door.Unlock the driver’s door.Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

This light fades out about 30 secondsafter you close both doors.

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.


Interior Lights

Courtesy Lights

104

IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT

DOOR LIGHT COURTESY LIGHT

０５／０７／２７　１５：４４：５２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１０７　

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The heating and cooling system inyour vehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

......Heating and Cooling System . 106......................Heating and A/C . 108

..........Climate Control System . 113Climate Control System

.......with navigation system . 117.........Dual Temperature Control . 121

.............Climate Control Sensors . 123...............................Audio System . 124

.................AM/FM/CD Player . 126............AM/FM/CD Changer . 136

AM/FM/CD Changer.......with navigation system . 149

...........AM/FM Radio Reception . 164...XM Satellite Radio Reception . 166

...................Protecting Your CDs . 169.........Caring for the Tape Player . 170

...............Remote Audio Controls . 171................Radio Theft Protection . 172

.........................Setting the Clock . 173...........................Security System . 174

..............................Cruise Control . 175HomeLink Universal

...............................Transceiver . 178

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour vehicle.

On all models except the 4-cylinder LX

Features

Features

105

０５／０７／２７　１５：４４：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１０８　

Read the appropriate pages in thissection for operation of the heatingand cooling systems installed in yourvehicle.

See pages to for themanual system.

See pages to for theautomatic system.

See pages to for theautomatic system with navigationsystem.

You can control the driver and thepassenger side temperatureindependently.The dual temperature control isreferred to page to .121 122

112108

116

120117

113


Heating and Cooling System

106

(LX,EX and LX-V6 models)

Automatic System

Manual System

(EX-L and EX-V6 models without navigation system)

U.S. models Canadian models

０５／０７／２７　１５：４５：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１０９　

Heating and Cooling System

Features

107

Automatic A/C System with navigation system

(EX-L and EX-V6 models)

U.S. models shown.

０５／０７／２７　１５：４５：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１０　

Turn the dial clockwise to increasethe fan speed and airflow. Turn thedial counterclockwise to decrease it.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator above the button is onwhen the A/C is on.

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dial

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Heating and A/C

108

FAN CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MODE BUTTONS

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

MAX A/C BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) BUTTON

LX, EX, and LX-V6 models

０５／０７／２７　１５：４５：２５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１１　

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches tofresh air mode and turns on the A/C.In this case, you cannot turn the A/Coff.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode.

Each time you press a mode button,the indicator above the button is on.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

When the recirculation indicator ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C,

selects , and switches torecirculation mode. Each indicatorabove the button is on when MAXA/C is turned on.

Use the mode control buttons toselect the vents air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

72

MAX A/C Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control

Recirculation Button

Heating and A/C

Features

109

０５／０７／２７　１５：４５：４９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１２　

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to the freshair mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator above thebutton comes on when a fan speedis selected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.1.

2.3.4.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

64

Ventilation Using the Heater Using the A/C

Heating and A/C

110

０５／０７／２７　１５：４６：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１３　

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.

Turn the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

Once the engine is warmed up, thissetting is suitable for all drivingconditions.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in fresh air mode.

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select the MAX A/C mode. Thesystem automatically turns on theA/C, selects and switchesto recirculation mode.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas previously off.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

1.1.2.

3.

2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

If the interior is very warm,

CONTINUED

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost

Heating and A/C

Features

111

０５／０７／２７　１５：４６：１９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１４　

Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. TheA/C indicator will not come on if itwas previously off.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below each vent.This sends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select fresh airmode to avoid fogging the windows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

Turning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.

When you switch to , fromor , the A/C stays on.

This helps prevent the windows fromrapidly fogging up when the air issuddenly routed away from thewindshield. If you want to turn theA/C off, press and release the A/Cbutton until the indicator in thebutton comes on and then goes off.

When you switch to orfrom or , the

A/C will stay on or off depending onhow it was set previously.

1.

2.3.

To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

To Turn Everything Off

Heating and A/C

112

０５／０７／２７　１５：４６：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１５　

CONTINUED

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Press the AUTO button. Theindicator in the button comes on.

Set the desired temperature byturning the driver’s sidetemperature control dial.

You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.

You will see FULL AUTO in thesystem’s display.

1.

2.

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

Climate Control System

Automatic Operation

Features

113

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

OFF BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATUREDISPLAY

AUTO BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

A/C BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTERBUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

EX -L and EX-V6 modelswithout navigation system(U.S. models)

EX -L and EX-V6 models(Canadian models)

０５／０７／２７　１５：４６：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１６　

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in full automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled.

Making any manual selection causesthe word AUTO in the display to goout.

When you turn the passenger’s sidetemperature control dial, theindicator in the DUAL button comeson and the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

Select the fan speed by pressing thefan control buttons ( or ).The fan speed is shown in verticalbars in the display.

Turn these dials to the desiredtemperature. The temperaturesetting is shown in the display.

The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings.

Making any manual selection causesthe word FULL in the display to goout.

121On U.S. models

On Canadian models

Semi-automatic Operation Fan Control Buttons

Temperature Control Dials


114

０５／０７／２７　１５：４７：０１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１７　

Press the DUAL button to selectdual temperature control mode (seepage ).

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control buttons belowthe outside temperature.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you press the DUAL buttonagain (indicator turns off), bothsides adjust to the driver’s sidetemperature.





This button turns the windshielddefrost on and off.When you push this button, air flowsfrom the defroster vents at the baseof the windshield, and the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Whenthe indicator in the button is on, thepassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.


121

72


Dual Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button Windshield Defroster Button


Features

115

０５／０７／２７　１５：４７：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１８　

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.





If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.



Mode Control To Turn Everything Off


116

０５／０７／２７　１５：４７：３２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１１９　

CONTINUED

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger. If the driver’sside of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.

The climate control system for yourvehicle can also be operated by voicecontrol. See the navigation section inyour quick start guide for anoverview of this system, and thenavigation system manual forcomplete details.


Voice Control System

Automatic Operation

Features

117

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

TEMPERATUREDISPLAY

DEFROST BUTTON

FAN CONTROLICONS

MODE ICONS

A/C BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING(A/C) ICONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DUAL BUTTON

EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system

０５／０７／２７　１５：４７：４３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２０　

▲ ▼

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit ( ) or its upper limit( ), the system runs at fullcooling or heating only. It does notregulate the interior temperature.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in full automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled.

If you press the A/C button next tothe display, the manual selectionswill show in the display. Making anymanual selection causes theindicator in the AUTO button to turnoff.

Press the AUTO button. Theindicator in the button comes on.

Set the desired temperature bypressing the driver’s sidetemperature control buttons. Press

to raise the temperature orto lower it. The selectedtemperature will show in the upperdisplay.

When you press the passenger’s sidetemperature control buttons, theindicator in the DUAL button comeson and the driver’s side andpassenger’s side temperature can becontrolled independently (see page

).

1.

2.

121


Semi-automatic Operation

118

０５／０７／２７　１５：４７：５４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２１　

▲ ▼

Select the fan speed by pressing theA/C button to view the display, thenpress any of the fan control icons.

Press these buttons ( or ) to thedesired temperature. Thetemperature setting is shown in theupper display.

Press the DUAL button to selectdual temperature control mode (seepage ).





The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings.

When you press the DUAL buttonagain (indicator turns off), bothsides adjust to the driver’s sidetemperature.

Press the A/C button to view thedisplay. Touching ON or OFF in thedisplay turns the air conditioning onand off. You will see A/C ON or A/COFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control buttons belowthe outside temperature.

121


Fan Control

Temperature Control Buttons

Dual Button Recirculation Button

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/Icons

Features

119

０５／０７／２７　１５：４８：０９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２２　

This button turns the windshielddefrost on and off.When you push the button, air flowsfrom the defroster vents at the baseof the windshield, and the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Whenthe indicator in the button is on, thepassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.


Use the mode control icons to selectthe vents the air flows from. Someair will flow from the dashboardcorner vents in all modes.

Press the A/C button to view thedisplay, then touch any of the modeicons on the display.





If you press the OFF button, theclimate control system shuts offcompletely.



When the climate control system isturned off, the temperature in theupper display also turns off.72

Windshield Defroster Button


Mode Control To Turn Everything Off


120

０５／０７／２７　１５：４８：２７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２３　

Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol dials, one for the driver, andone for the front passenger.

Your vehicle has four temperaturecontrol buttons, two for the driver,and two for the passenger.

The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these dials or buttonswhen the indicator in the DUALbutton is on.

CONTINUED

With navigation system

On EX-L and EX-V6 models withoutnavigation system

Dual Temperature Control

Features

121

DUAL BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

Without navigation system

With navigation system

０５／０７／２７　１５：４８：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２４　

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

To set the driver’s side temperaturedifferently than the passenger’s,press the DUAL button, then turnthe driver’s control dial or press the

or buttons on the driver’s side.To set the passenger’s sidedifferently than the driver’s, turn thepassenger’s control dial or press the

or buttons on the passenger’sside. You can adjust the passenger’sside without pressing the DUALbutton first.

When you set the temperature to itslower or upper limit, it is displayed as

or .

Push AUTO or to turn on thesystem. The selected temperaturesappears in the display (in the upperdisplay with the navigation system).When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature byadjusting the driver’s sidetemperature control dial or buttons.

Temperature Control Dials/Buttons

Dual Temperature Control

122

PASSENGER’S SIDEDRIVER’S SIDE

０５／０７／２７　１５：４８：４５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２５　

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.


Climate Control Sensors

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Features

123

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

０５／０７／２７　１５：４８：５１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２６　

To operate your vehicle’s audiosystem refer to the appropriatepages below.

For FM/AM/CD Player systems,see pages thru .

For AM/FM/CD Changersystems without navigation, seepage thru .

For AM/FM/CD Changersystems with navigation, see page

to thru .

126 135

148136

149 163

Audio System

124

AM/FM/CD Player(LX models)

０５／０７／２７　１５：４８：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２７　

Audio System

Features

125

AM/FM/CD Changer

Canadian modelsU.S. models

AM/FM/CD Changer with navigation system(EX-L and EX-V6 models)U.S. models .

(EX-L and EX-V6 models without navigation system)

(EX and LX-V6 models)

０５／０７／２７　１５：４９：０９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２８　

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe PWR/VOL knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FM button. On the FM band, STwill be displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is notavailable.

To Play the AM/FM Radio

AM/FM/CD Player

126

STEREO INDICATOR

SCAN BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

SEEK BAR

PRESET BARS

PWR/VOL KNOB

TUNE BAR

LX models

AUTO SELECT

BUTTON

０５／０７／２７　１５：４９：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１２９　

－

－

－－－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, thepreset bars, and auto select.

Use the tune bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.

The seek functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of thebar, then release it.

The scan function samplesall the stations with strong signals onthe selected band. To activate it,press the SCAN button, then releaseit. You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and play itfor 5 seconds. When it plays a stationthat you want to listen to, press theSCAN button again.

Each side of the bars (16) can store one frequency on AMand two frequencies on FM.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each side ofthe preset bar.

Pick a preset number (1 6), youwant for that station. Press the leftor right side of the bar, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN Preset

AM/FM/CD Player

Features

127

０５／０７／２７　１５：４９：２９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３０　

－

－

－

－

－

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset bar if auto selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset bar.

, press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset bars.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset barsas previously described.

Press the SOUND button repeatedlyto display the bass (BAS), treble(TRE), fader (FAD), and balance(BAL) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the PWR/VOLknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in thedisplay.The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the fader, or thefront-to-back strength of the sound.

Adjusts the balance, or side-to-side strength of the sound.

To turn off auto select

AUTO SELECT Adjusting the Sound

BAS

TRE

FAD

BAL

AM/FM/CD Player

128

０５／０７／２７　１５：４９：４３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３１　

CONTINUED

To play a CD, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON(II) position.

Insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way to play it. When thesystem reaches the end of the disc,it will return to the beginning andplay the disc again.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm)discs without using an adapterring.

You operate the CD player withthe same controls used for theradio. To select the CD player,press the CD/AUX button. Youwill see ‘‘CD’’ in the display. Thenumber of the track playing isshown in the display. The systemwill continuously play a disc untilyou change modes.

AM/FM/CD Player

To Play a CD

Features

129

AM/FM BUTTON TRACK NUMBER

CD SLOTEJECT BUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

PWR/VOL KNOB

LX models

CD/AUXBUTTON

SCAN/REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

０５／０７／２７　１５：４９：５４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３２　

－－

－

－

Each time youpress and release , the playerskips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

The scan function samplesall the tracks on the disc in the orderthey are recorded on the CD. Toactivate it, press and hold the SCANbutton. You will see SCAN in thedisplay. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each track on the CD.Press the SCAN button again to getout of the system and play the lasttrack sampled.

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press it again to turn it off.

Press and release theRDM button to play the tracks inrandom order. You will see RDM inthe display. Press it again to returnto normal play.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD/AUX button again toswitch back to the CD player.

To play a tape when a CD is playing,insert a tape in the player (optional).If a tape is in the player, press theCD/AUX button. Press the CD/AUXbutton again to switch back to theCD player. To move rapidly within a track, press

and hold or .

To Change or Select TracksSEEK/SKIP

SCAN

REPEAT

RANDOM

AM/FM/CD Player

130

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

０５／０７／２７　１５：５０：０５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３３　

－＋

－＋


An optional six or eight disc CDchanger is available for your vehiclefrom your dealer.

This disc changer uses the samecontrols used for the in-dash CDplayer or the radio.

Load the desired CDs into themagazine, and load the magazineinto the changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available CD to load andplay.

If there are no CDs in the changer,the display will flash, and you willhave to select another mode.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD/AUX button.

Press the AM/FM button to switchto the AM/FM radio while a CD isplaying. To play the CD, press theCD/AUX button.

If a tape is in the optional tape player,press the CD/AUX button to switchto the tape while a CD is playing.Press the CD/AUX button again toswitch back to the CD player.

To select the CD changer, press theCD/AUX button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use the preset 5(DISC ) side or preset 6 (DISC )side of the preset bar. To select theprevious disc, press the preset 5(DISC ), or preset 6 (DISC ) toselect the next disc in sequence.

To Stop Playing a CD Operating the Optional CDChanger

AM/FM/CD Player

Features

131

０５／０７／２７　１５：５０：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３４　

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Press the eject button, and pull out the CD.Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.Press the eject button, and pull out the CD.Check the CD for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the CD isejected, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takethe vehicle to your dealer.

CD Player Error Messages

AM/FM/CD Player

132

０５／０７／２７　１５：５０：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３５　

Error Message SolutionCause

Press the magazine eject button, pull themagazine out, and check for an error message.Insert the magazine again. If the message doesnot disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulledout, see your dealer.Press the magazine eject button, pull themagazine out, and check for an error message.Insert the magazine again. If the message doesnot disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulledout, see your dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

If you see an error message in thedisplay while operating the optionalCD changer, find the cause in thechart to the right. If you cannot clearthe error message, take the vehicleto your dealer.

AM/FM/CD Player

Optional CD Changer ErrorMessages

Features

133

０５／０７／２７　１５：５０：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３６　

▲

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Make sure the open side ofthe tape is facing right, then insertthe tape most of the way into the slot.The system will pull the tape in therest of the way and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator comeson to show you which side of thetape is playing. The indicates theside you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side of the preset bar. Whenthe player reaches the end of thetape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side.

OptionalTo Play a Tape

AM/FM/CD Player

134

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

CD/AUXBUTTON

REPEATINDICATOR

AM/FM BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

PRESET BARS

PWR/VOL KNOB

LX models

REPEAT BUTTON

DOLBYINDICATOR

０５／０７／２７　１５：５０：４４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３７　

＊

－

－

－

＊

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories LicensingCorporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To switch to the AM/FM radio orCD player while a tape is playing,press the AM/FM or CD/AUXbutton. To change back to the tapeplayer, push the CD/AUX button.

To rewind the tape,push the preset 1 (REW) side of thepreset bar. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the preset 2 (FF) side of thepreset bar. You will see FF displayed.Press the preset 1, 2, or 3 side of thebars to take the system out of rewindor fast forward.

Press the side to findthe beginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.

The skip and repeatfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

Dolby noise reduction comes onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator in the display alsocomes on. If the tape was notrecorded in Dolby, turn it off bypressing the preset 4 (NR) side ofthe preset bar. Dolby remains offuntil you press the preset bar again.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton on the tape player. If youwant to turn the player off, press thePWR/VOL knob or turn off theignition. The tape will remain in thedrive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will be in pausemode. Press the preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side of the preset bar.

To Stop Playing a Tape

FF/REWTape Search Functions

SKIP

REPEAT

AM/FM/CD Player

Features

135

NOTE:

０５／０７／２７　１５：５０：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３８　


The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction inAM is not available.

For information on XM satellite radio,see page .139

On U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models

To Play the AM/FM Radio

AM/FM/CD Changer

136

TUNE BAR

SOUND BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR

SEEK BAR

SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESETBARS

A.SELBUTTON

NOTE: This illustration shows the U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models.Other models are similar.

EX, EX-L, and all V6 models without navigation system

０５／０７／２８　１３：３７：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１３９　

－

－

－－－

－

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, thepreset bars, and auto select.

Use the tune bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and press the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency.


The scan function samplesall the stations with strong signals onthe selected band. To activate it,press the SCAN button, then releaseit. You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and play itfor 5 seconds. When it plays a stationthat you want to listen to, press theSCAN button again.

Each side of the bars (16) can store one frequency on AMand two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each side ofthe preset bar.


Pick a preset number (1 6), youwant for that station. Press the leftor right side of the bar, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

To Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN Preset

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

137

０５／０７／２８　１３：３８：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４０　

－

－

－

－

－

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.



You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset bar if auto selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset bar.

, press theA. SEL button. This restores thepresets you originally set.

Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM, and twelve FM stations inthe preset bars.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset barsas previously described.

Press the SOUND button repeatedlyto display the bass (BAS), treble(TRE), fader (FAD), and balance(BAL) settings.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the PWR/VOLknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in thedisplay.The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

Adjusts the bass.


Adjusts the treble.


4.

To turn off auto selectAUTO SELECT

Adjusting the Sound

BAS

BAL

TRE

FAD

AM/FM/CD Changer

138

０５／０７／２８　１３：３８：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４１　

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States except Hawaii andAlaska. It is not available in Canada.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.Satellite radio is available on U.S.models only.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob or the CD/AUX/XM button.

Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjustthe volume.

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 modelsSatellite Digital Radio

To Play XM Satellite Radio

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

139

PRESET BARS

CATEGORY INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BAR

SCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

TUNE BAR

DISPLAYBUTTON

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models

CD/AUX/XMBUTTON

０５／０７／２８　１３：３８：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４２　

－

－

－

－

－

The scan function samplesall channels for 5 seconds. Toactivate the function, push the SCANbutton. Push it again to get out of thesequence.

Each side of the presetbar can store one channel in XM1and one in XM2.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on XM1 andsix on XM2.

Theseek/skip function selects thevarious categories in XM, such asJazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.Push the to change thecategory forward. Push the tochange the category backward. Tosearch for channels within acategory, press the TUNE bar .Press the TUNE bar to change

channel selections. Press forhigher numbered channels and

for lower numbered channels.

When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of four methods tofind channels: tune, seek/skip(category), scan, and thepreset bars.

Push the CD/AUX/XM button.(You will see XM1 or XM2.)

Press and release thisbutton to change the display. Thedisplay changes in this sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.


Pick a preset icon or number, andhold it until you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To Select a Channel SCAN

Preset

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)

TUNE

DISP

AM/FM/CD Changer

140

０５／０７／２８　１３：３８：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４３　

＊

＊

CONTINUED

To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON(II) position.

On models with Satellite Radio

You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.To select the CD changer, press theCD/AUX button (CD/AUX/XMbutton on models with satelliteradio). The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Withthe in-dash CD changer, the disc andtrack numbers are displayed. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

:

To Play a CD

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

141

CD/AUXBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

LOAD BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

CD LOADINDICATOR

CD SLOT

TRACK NUMBERAM/FM BUTTON

DISC NUMBER REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

PRESETBARS


CD/AUX/XMBUTTON

EX, EX-L and all V6 models without navigation system

０５／０７／２８　１３：３８：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４４　

Your vehicle’s in-dash CD changerholds up to six discs. You cannot load and play 3-inch

(8-cm) discs in this system.

When the CD load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in thescreen again, insert the next CD inthe slot.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAd’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system beginsplaying the last CD loaded.

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in thedisplay.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and the redCD load indicator starts blinking.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XMbutton again to switch back to theCD changer.


To listen to satellite radio when a CDis playing, press the CD/AUX/XMbutton.

To play a tape when a CD is playing,insert a tape in the player (optional).If a tape is in the player, press theCD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM button.Press the CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XMbutton again to switch back to theCD changer.

Insert a disc into the CD slot whenthe green CD load indicator comeson. Insert it only about halfway;the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ inthe display as the CD loadindicator turns red and blinks asthe CD is loaded.

1.

2.

1.

3.

4.

5.


Loading CDs in the In-dash CDChanger

AM/FM/CD Changer

142


０５／０７／２８　１３：３９：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４５　

－

－－

＋

－

－

The scan function samplesall the tracks on the selected disc inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate it, press and releasethe SCAN button. You will see SCANin the display. You will get a 10second sampling of each track on theselected CD. Press the SCAN buttonagain to get out of the system.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bypressing the appropriate side of apreset bar. The system stops playingthe current CD and starts theloading sequence. It plays the CDjust loaded.

You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.The numbers of the disc and trackplaying are shown in the display.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate side of a preset bar(1 6) or use the preset 5 (DISC )to select the previous disc or preset 6(DISC ) to select the next disc insequence.If you select a loadedposition in the CD changer, thesystem will try to load the CD in thenext available slot.

Each time youpress and release , the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold or .

This function samplesthe first track of each disc in theorder they are loaded in the CDchanger. To activate it, select D-SCAN by pressing and holding theSCAN button. You will see D-SCANin the display. You will get a 10second sampling of the first track oneach CD. Press the SCAN buttonagain to turn off D-SCAN.

SCANTo Change or Select TracksSEEK/SKIP

D-SCAN

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

143

０５／０７／２８　１３：３９：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４６　

－

－

－

To continuously replaya track, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. Press it again to turn it off.

To continuouslyreplay the current disc, press andhold the RPT button. You will seeD-RPT in the display. Press the RPTbutton again to turn it off.

Press and release theRDM button to play the tracks inrandom order. You will see RDM inthe display. Press it again to returnto normal play.

If a tape is in the optional tape player,press the CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XMbutton to switch to the tape while aCD is playing. Press the CD/AUX orCD/AUX/XM button again to switchback to the CD changer.

Press the AM/FM or CD/AUX/XMbutton to switch to the AM/FMradio or satellite radio while a CD isplaying. To play the CD, press theCD/AUX/XM button again.




REPEAT

D-REPEAT

RANDOM

To Stop Playing a CD

AM/FM/CD Changer

144

０５／０７／２８　１３：３９：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４７　

－＋

－＋

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.


To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject ( ) button. Whena disc is removed from a slot, thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 15 seconds, the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc willreload into the system and willremain there in a pause mode.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset bar. When thatCD begins playing, press the ejectbutton. Continue pressing the ejectbutton to remove all the discs fromthe changer.

An optional eight disc CD changer isavailable for your vehicle from yourdealer.

This disc changer uses the samecontrols used for the in-dash CDchanger or the radio.

To select the CD changer, press theCD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM button.The disc and track numbers will bedisplayed. To select a different disc,use the preset 5 (DISC ) side orpreset 6 (DISC ) side of the presetbar. To select the previous disc,press the preset 5 (DISC ), orpreset 6 (DISC ) to select the nextdisc in sequence.


Operating the Optional CDChanger

Removing CDs from the In-dashCD Changer

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

145

０５／０７／２８　１３：３９：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４８　

SolutionError Message Cause

Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.Check for an error message, and insert the CDsagain. If the message does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.Check for an error message, and insert the CDsagain. If the message does not disappear, or theCDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

:: U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models

EX, LX-V6, Canadian EX-L, and Canadian EX-V6 models

If you see an error message in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror message, take the vehicle to aHonda dealer.

AM/FM/CD Changer

CD Changer Error Messages

146

０５／０７／２８　１３：３９：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１４９　

▲

＊

＊ CONTINUED

The tape direction indicator comeson to show you which side of thetape is playing. The indicates theside you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, press the preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side of the preset bar. Whenthe player reaches the end of thetape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side.



Optional

:

To Play a Tape

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

147

AM/FM BUTTON

CD/AUXBUTTON

PRESET BARS

PWR/VOL KNOB


DOLBY INDICATOR

REPEAT INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BAR

CD/AUX(XM)BUTTON


RPTBUTTON

EX, EX-L, and all V6 models without navigation system

０５／０７／２８　１３：３９：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５０　

－

－

－＊

＊ Press the side to findthe beginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

Press the RPT buttonto continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button again.


To rewind the tape,push the preset 1 (REW) side of thepreset bar. You will see REW in thedisplay. To fast forward the tape,push the preset 2 (FF) side of thepreset bar. You will see FF displayed.Press the preset 1, 2, or 3 side of thebars to take the system out of rewindor fast forward.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton on the tape player. If youwant to turn the player off, press thePWR/VOL knob or turn off theignition. The tape will remain in thedrive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will be in pausemode. Press the preset 3 (PLAY/PROG) side of the preset bar.

Dolby noise reduction comes onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator in the display alsocomes on. If the tape was notrecorded in Dolby, turn it off bypressing the preset 4 (NR) side ofthe preset bar. Dolby remains offuntil you press the preset bar again.

To switch to the AM/FM radio,Satellite Radio (U.S. models), or CDchanger while a tape is playing, pressthe AM/FM or CD/AUX button(CD/AUX/XM button on modelswith satellite radio). To change backto the tape player, push the CD/AUXor CD/AUX/XM button.



SKIP

REPEATTape Search FunctionsFF/REW

To Stop Playing a Tape

AM/FM/CD Changer

148

NOTE:

０５／０７／２８　１３：４０：０８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５１　

The audio system for your vehiclecan also be operated by voice control.See the navigation section in yourquick start guide for an overview ofthis system, and the navigationsystem manual for complete details.

AM/FM/CD Changer

Voice Control System

Features

149

AM/FM BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK BAR

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

PRESET ICONS

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTON

SOUND ICONSCANICON

AUTO SELECT ICON

UPPER DISPLAY

EX-L and EX-V6 models withnavigation system

０５／０７／２８　１３：４０：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５２　

－

－－


The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, touchthe SCAN icon. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about 5 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 5 seconds. When it plays astation you want to listen to, touchthe SCAN icon again.


Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton will also turn on the system.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, thepreset icons, and auto select.

Use the TUNE/SOUNDknob to tune the radio to a desiredfrequency. Turn the knob right totune to a higher frequency, and turnthe knob left to tune to a lowerfrequency.The band and frequency that the

radio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction inAM is not available.

For information on XM satellite radio,see page .153

SEEK

SCAN

To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

AM/FM/CD Changer

150

０５／０７／２８　１３：４０：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５３　

－

－ Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.



Each preset icon can storeone frequency on AM, and twofrequencies on FM.

Touch the AUTO SELECT icon.‘‘A. SEL’’ flashes in the upper display,and the system goes into scan modefor several seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset icons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed afterpressing a preset icon if auto selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset icon.

If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset iconsas previously described.

To turn off auto select, touch theAUTO SELECT icon. This restoresthe presets you originally set.

Push the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonto see the preset icons. Then selectthe desired band, AM or FM. FM1and FM2 let you store twofrequencies with each preset icon.


Pick the preset icon you want forthat station. Touch the icon, andhold it until you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

4.

AUTO SELECT

Preset

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

151

０５／０７／２８　１３：４０：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５４　

－

－

－

－

Touch the arrows next to the BAS orTRE icons. The adjustment showsyou the current setting. Touch theleft or right bars on the sound grid.Balance is equalized when thevertical lines are centered on thegrid. Touch the front or rear bars onthe sound grid. The fader isequalized when the horizontal linesare centered on the grid.

Touch the SOUND icon or press theTUNE/SOUND knob.

If you want to adjust the sound whilethe radio/CD is playing, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button, then touchthe SOUND icon in the display.

The system will return to the audiodisplay about 5 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode. Touch theReturn icon to go back to the audioscreen.



Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusting the Sound

BAL

FAD

TRE

BAS

AM/FM/CD Changer

152

FADER ADJUST ICONS SOUND GRID

RETURN ICON

BALANCEADJUST ICONS

BASS ADJUST ICONS

TREBLE ADJUST ICONS

０５／０７／２８　１３：４０：５０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５５　

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States except Hawaii andAlaska. It is not available in Canada.

Satellite radio is available on U.S.models only.

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob, the CD/AUX/XM,button or the AUDIO DISPLAY

Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjustthe volume.

U.S. modelsSatellite Digital Radio

To Play XM Satellite Radio

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

153

SCAN ICON MODE ICON

CHANNEL INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIP BAR

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTONSCAN BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

TUNE KNOB

CH/DISC BAR

PRESET ICONS

U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system

CD/AUX/XMBUTTON

０５／０７／２８　１３：４１：００　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５６　

button.

－－

－

－

－

Each preset icon can storeone channel in XM1 and one in XM2.

Pick a preset icon, and hold it untilyou hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on XM1 andsix on XM2.

Theseek/skip function selects thevarious categories in XM, such asJazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.Push to change the categoryforward. Push to change the

category backward. To search for channels within a category, turn theTUNE knob clockwise.

Once your XM channels are preset,pressing either side of the CH/DISCbar will select your preset channels.

When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of four methods tofind channels: tune, seek/skip(category), scan, and thepreset icons.

Turn the TUNE knob to changechannels. Turn the knob right forhigher numbered channels and leftfor lower numbered channels.

Push the CD/AUX/XM button.(You will see XM1 or XM2.)

To switch betweenchannel mode and category mode,touch the MODE icon.

The scan function samplesall channels for 5 seconds. Toactivate the function, push the SCANbutton. Push it again to get out of scan.


1.

2.

3.

4.

PresetSEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)To Select a Channel

TUNE

MODE

SCAN

AM/FM/CD Changer

154

０５／０７／２８　１３：４１：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５７　

＊

＊

To load or play CDs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON(II) position.You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.To select the CD changer, press theCD/AUX/XM button (CD/AUXbutton on Canadian models). Thenumber of the track playing is shownin the display. With the in-dash CDchanger, the disc and track numbersare displayed. The system willcontinuously play a CD until youchange modes.


: CONTINUEDOn Canadian models

AM/FM/CD Changer

To Play a CD

Features

155

CH/DISC BAR

CD SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

DISCSCANICON

TRACKSCAN ICON

SEEK/SKIP BAR

DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS

UPPER DISPLAY

RANDOM ICON

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SCAN BUTTON

TRACK REPEATICON DISC REPEAT

ICON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

DISC ICONS

U.S. model is shown. LOAD BUTTON

CD/AUX/XM BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON


０５／０７／２８　１３：４１：２５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５８　


Your vehicle’s in-dash CD changerholds up to six discs.

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in theupper display.

To load only one CD, press andrelease the LOAD button.

The disc icon for an emptyposition is highlighted and the redCD load indicator starts blinking.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUXbutton again to switch back to theCD changer.

To play the tape when a CD isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUXbutton. Press the CD/AUX/XM orCD/AUX button again to switchback to the CD changer.

To listen to satellite radio when a CDis playing, press the CD/AUX/XMbutton.

1.

2.

On U.S. models

AM/FM/CD Changer

Loading CDs in the In-dash CDChanger

156


０５／０７／２８　１３：４１：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１５９　

▲▼

－


Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. If you are not loadingall six positions, the system beginsplaying the last CD loaded.

Do not try to insert a disc until‘‘LOAd’’ appears. You coulddamage the audio unit.

When the CD load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in thescreen again, insert the next CD inthe slot.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing bytouching a disc icon. The systemstops playing the current CD andstarts the loading sequence. It playsthe CD just loaded.

You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.The numbers of the disc and trackplaying are shown in the display.These numbers also appear in theupper display.

To select a different disc, touch theappropriate disc icon or press theor side of the CH/DISC bar. Ifyou select a loaded position in theCD changer, the system will try toload the CD in the next available slot.

Insert a disc into the CD slot whenthe green CD load indicator comeson. Insert it only about halfway;the drive will pull it in the rest ofthe way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ inthe upper display as the CD loadindicator turns red and blinks asthe CD is loaded.

To use the controls, press theAUDIO DISPLAY button.

When you touchthis icon on the audio display orpress the SCAN button, you will geta 10 second sampling of each trackon the current CD. You will seeTRACK SCAN highlighted on theaudio screen and SCAN in the upperdisplay. Press the icon or buttonagain to get out of track scan.4.

5.

3.

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Tracks

TRACK SCAN

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

157

０５／０７／２８　１３：４１：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６０　

－

－

－

－

－

－ ▲ ▼

When you touch theRANDOM icon on the audio display,the system plays the tracks on thecurrent CD in random order. Youwill see RANDOM highlighted onthe audio screen and RDM in theupper display. To turn this featureoff, touch RANDOM again or selecta different disc icon.

When you touchthe TRACK RPT icon, the systemcontinuously plays the same track.You will see TRACK RPThighlighted on the audio screen andRPT in the upper display. Press theicon again to get out of track repeat.

When you touch theDISC RPT icon on the audio display,the system continuously replays thecurrent CD. You will see DISC RPThighlighted on the audio screen andD-RPT in the upper display. Touchthe icon to turn the feature off.

When you touch theDISC SCAN icon on the audiodisplay, the system gives you a 10second sampling of the first track oneach disc in the in-dash CD changer.You will see DISC SCAN highlightedon the audio screen and D-SCAN inthe upper display. Touch the iconagain to get out of disc scan.

Each time youpress and release , the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext track. Press and release toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current track. Press it again toskip to the beginning of the previoustrack.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold or .

Press the or toselect an icon and play the disc.

Press the AM/FM or CD/AUX/XMbutton to switch to the AM/FMradio or satellite radio while a CD isplaying. To play the CD, press theCD/AUX/XM button again.



If a tape is in the optional tape player,press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUXbutton to switch to the tape while aCD is playing. Press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX button again toswitch back to the CD changer.

On Canadian models

On U.S. modelsTo Stop Playing a CDRANDOM

TRACK RPT

DISC RPT

DISC SCAN

SEEK/SKIP

CH/DISC

AM/FM/CD Changer

158

０５／０７／２８　１３：４１：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６１　

▼ ▲

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off. The disc thatwas last selected is ejected first.


To remove the disc currently in play,press the eject ( ) button. Whenyou remove a disc is removed from aslot, the system automatically begins the load sequence so you can loadanother CD in that position. If you donot remove the disc from the changer within 15 seconds, the system returns to the previous mode (AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc will reload into the system and willremain there in a pause mode.

An optional eight disc CD changer isavailable for your vehicle from yourdealer.

This disc changer uses the samecontrols used for the in-dash CDchanger or the radio.

To remove a different CD from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate icon or the CH/DISC bar.When that CD begins playing, pressthe eject button. Continue pressingthe eject button to remove all thediscs from the changer.

To select the CD changer, press theCD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX button.The disc and track numbers will bedisplayed. To select a different disc,use the CH/DISC bar. To select theprevious disc, press the side, orside to select the next disc insequence.


Operating the Optional CDChanger

Removing CDs from the In-dashCD Changer

AM/FM/CD Changer

Features

159

０５／０７／２８　１３：４２：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６２　

Error Message Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.Check for an error message, and insert the CDsagain. If the message does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.Check for an error message, and insert the CDsagain. If the message does not disappear, or theCDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.

If you see an error message in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror message, take the vehicle to aHonda dealer.

CD Changer Error Messages

AM/FM/CD Changer

160

０５／０７／２８　１３：４２：１４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６３　

▲

＊

＊


The tape direction indicator comeson to show you which side of thetape is playing. The indicates theside you inserted upward is nowplaying. If you want to play the otherside, touch the PLAY/PROG icon.When the player reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side.

: On Canadian models

Optional

AM/FM/CD Changer

To Play a Tape

Features

161

TUNE/SOUND KNOB

FAST FORWARD ICON

PLAY/PROG ICON

REWIND ICON

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIP BAR CH/DISC BAR

REPEAT INDICATOR

UPPER DISPLAY

AUDIO DISPLAYBUTTON

NOISE REDUCTION(NR) ICON


REPEAT ICON

CD/AUX/XMBUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

U.S. model is shown.


０５／０７／２８　１３：４２：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６４　

＊

－▲

▼＊

First push the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton before selecting any of theaudio icons on the audio screen.

To remove the tape, press the ejectbutton on the tape player. If youwant to turn the player off, press thePWR/VOL knob or turn off theignition. The tape will remain in thedrive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will be in pausemode. Touch the PLAY/PROG icon.

To fast forward thetape, push the upper side ( ) of theCH/DISC bar. You will see FF in theupper display. To rewind the tape,push the lower side ( ) of the CH/DISC bar. You will see REWdisplayed. Press either side of theCH/DISC bar or touch the FF, REWor PLAY/PROG icon to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.

Dolby noise reduction comes onwhen you insert a tape. The NRindicator in the display also comeson. If the tape was not recorded inDolby, turn it off by touching the NRicon. Dolby remains off until youtouch the NR icon again. To switch to the AM/FM radio,

Satellite Radio (U.S. models), or CDchanger while a tape is playing, pressthe AM/FM or CD/AUX/XM button(CD/AUX button on Canadianmodels). To change back to the tapeplayer, push the CD/AUX/XM orCD/AUX button.



AM/FM/CD Changer

To Stop Playing a Tape Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

162

０５／０７／２８　１３：４２：３２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６５　

－

－

Press the side to findthe beginning of the current song orpassage. Press the side to findthe beginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

Touch the RPT icon tocontinuously play a song or passage.You will see RPT displayed in theupper display. The track will repeatuntil you touch the RPT icon again.


AM/FM/CD Changer

SKIP

REPEAT

Features

163

NOTE:

０５／０７／２８　１３：４２：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６６　

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio ReceptionAM/FM Radio Frequencies

AM/FM Radio Reception

164

０５／０７／２８　１３：４２：４９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６７　

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception

Features

165

０５／０７／２８　１３：４２：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６８　

Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

Available on some U.S. modelsSatellite Radio Signals

XM Satellite Radio Reception

166

Signal may beblocked bymountains orlarge obstaclesto the south.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

Signal is weaker inthese areas.

０５／０７／２８　１３：４３：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１６９　

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the south side of aneast/west mountain road.Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

There may also be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem, and press the CD/AUX/XMbutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

CONTINUED

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


Features

167

０５／０７／２８　１３：４３：１７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７０　

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number.To get your radio I.D. number:

Turn the TUNE knob or press theTUNE bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in thedisplay. Your I.D. will appear in thedisplay.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,and you’ll be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom the activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

www.xmradio.com


168

０５／０７／２８　１３：４３：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７１　

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly or possibly jam in the drive.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the system.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player/CD changer or themagazine.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDs

Features

169


０５／０７／２８　１３：４３：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７２　

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

If you see the error message‘‘ ’’ on the display (on theupper display on models withnavigation system), press the tapeeject button to remove the tape fromthe unit. Make sure the tape is notdamaged. If the tape will not eject orthe error message stays on after thetape ejects, take the vehicle to yourdealer.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand causes the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

Optional

Caring for the Tape Player

170

０５／０７／２８　１３：４３：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７３　

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit twice to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

If you are playing a tape in theoptional tape player, press the top( ) of the CH button to advance tothe next selection. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousselection. The system senses a silentperiod, then resumes playing.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (ifequipped). On models with satelliteradio system, you can also selectXM1 and XM2.

Three control buttons for the audiosystem are mounted in the steeringwheel hub. These buttons let youcontrol basic audio functions withoutremoving your hand from the wheel.

On all models except the 4-cylinder LX

Remote Audio Controls

Features

171

VOL BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

CH BUTTON

０５／０７／２８　１３：４３：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７４　

－Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific code using the presetbars or the TUNE knob. Becausethere are hundreds of numbercombinations possible, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have ten tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin ten attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

You will have to store your favoritestations on each side of the presetbars (1 6) or icons after the systembegins working. Your originalsettings were lost when the powerwas disconnected.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system’sserial number.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ ’’/‘‘ ’’ in the frequency displaythe next time you turn on the system.Use the preset bars to enter the code.The code is on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

On on models except the 4-cylinder LX

Radio Theft Protection

172

０５／０７／２８　１３：４４：０５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７５　

The upper display shows the timewhen the ignition switch is in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.The navigation system receivessignals from the Global PositioningSystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemowner’s manual to set up the time.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.

To set the time, press the clock set(SOUND) button until you hear abeep. The displayed time begins toblink.

Press and hold the H (preset 4) sideof the bar until the hour advances tothe desired time. Press and hold theM (preset 5) side of the bar until theminutes advance to the desired time.

Press the clock set (SOUND) buttonagain to enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, pressing theclock set (SOUND) button until youhear a beep, then pressing the R(preset 6) side of the bar sets theclock back to the previous hour. If

the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets forward to thebeginning of the next hour.

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

On models without navigation system

On models with navigation system

Setting the Clock

Features

173

CLOCK SET BUTTON

PRESET BARS

CLOCK

EX-L and EX-V6 models withoutnavigation system is shown.

０５／０７／２８　１３：４４：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７６　

Once the security system is set,opening either door without usingthe key or the remote transmitter,the hood, or the trunk will cause thesystem to alarm. It also alarms if theradio is removed from the dashboardor the wiring is cut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk lock is forced, or the trunk isopened with the trunk release handleor the emergency trunk opener.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights (low beam), parkinglights, side marker lights, andtaillights flash if someone attemptsto break into your vehicle or removethe radio. This alarm continues for 2minutes, then it stops. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemindicator on the instrument panelstarts blinking immediately to showyou the system is setting itself.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or either door is notfully closed. Before you leave thevehicle, make sure the doors, trunk,and hood are securely closed.

To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

Security System

174

NOTE:


０５／０７／２８　１３：４４：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７７　

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel comes onto show the system is nowactivated.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel will come on.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel thecruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel will comeback on.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

175

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０５／０７／２８　１３：４４：３８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７８　

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal untilyou reach the desired cruisingspeed, then press the DECEL/SET button.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Even with cruise control turned on,you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal cause cruise control tocancel.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the DECEL/SET button.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

If you need to decrease yourspeed quickly, apply the brakes asyou normally would.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

176

NOTE:

０５／０７／２８　１３：４４：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１７９　

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on, and the vehicle willaccelerate to the same cruisingspeed as before.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features

177

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

０５／０７／２８　１３：４５：００　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１８０　

－

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

They do not have the safety featurethat causes the motor to stop andreverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.

The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote controltransmitter for the device (garagedoor, automatic gate, securitysystem, etc.) has a fresh battery.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote 2 to 5 inches fromHomeLink. Make sure you are notblocking your view of the redindicator in HomeLink.

Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then go to step1.

2.

1.

On EX-V6 model

General Information


Training HomeLinkBefore you begin

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

178

０５／０７／２８　１３：４５：１４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１８１　

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1

second.If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 6.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:Go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

180


Features

179

０５／０７／２８　１３：４５：２９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１８２　

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem


180

TRAINING BUTTON

０５／０７／２８　１３：４５：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１８３　




You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

1.

2.

178

Erasing Codes

Retraining a ButtonCustomer Assistance


Features

181

０５／０７／２８　１３：４５：５４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１８４　

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 184.................Fuel Recommendation . 184

.........Service Station Procedures . 185....................................Refueling . 185

Opening and Closing................................the Hood . 186

...................................Oil Check . 188.............Engine Coolant Check . 189

...............................Fuel Economy . 190...Accessories and Modifications . 191

.............................Carrying Cargo . 193

Before Driving

Before

Driving

183

０５／０７／２８　１３：４６：０１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１８６　

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.

If you drive with the low enginespeed (below than about 1,000 rpm),you may feel the engine knocking. Inthis case, you can use premiumunleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 91 or higher toprevent the engine from knocking.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not tow a trailer.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

On EX-V6 model with manualtransmission

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

184

０５／０７／２８　１３：４６：１４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１８７　

CONTINUED

Open the fuel fill door by pushingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

1.

2.

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures

Before

Driving

185

FUEL FILL CAP

TETHER

Push

ATTACHMENT

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０５／０７／２８　１３：４６：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１８８　

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Insert theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,the malfunction indicator lampmay come on (see page ). Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK FUELCAP’’ message on the informationdisplay.

5.

6.

1.

3.

4.

277

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Opening and Closing the Hood

186

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

０５／０７／２８　１３：４６：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１８９　

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

To close the hood, lift it up slightlyto remove the support rod fromthe hole. Put the support rod backinto its holding clip. Lower thehood to about a foot (30 cm) abovethe fender, then let it drop. Makesure it is securely latched.

To close the hood, lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then press down firmly withyour hands. Make sure it is securelylatched.

Pull the support rod out of its clipby holding the grip, and insert theend into the designated hole in thehood.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood. The hood latchhandle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pullthis handle until it releases thehood, then lift the hood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

3.2. 6-cylinder models4-cylinder models


Before

Driving

187

GRIP

CLIP

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder modelsLATCH

０５／０７／２８　１３：４６：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９０　

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle/loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its hole.

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.

232


Oil Check

Adding Engine Oil

188

DIPSTICK(Orange Handle)

DIPSTICK(Orange Loop)

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models

０５／０７／２８　１３：４６：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９１　

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page .236

226


Engine Coolant Check

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

Before

Driving

189

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

RESERVE TANK

4-cylinder models

MIN

MAX

MAX RESERVE TANK

6-cylinder models MIN6-cylinder models

０５／０７／２８　１３：４７：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９２　

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages displayed in theinformation display. See

(see page).

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

226

For example,

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

190

０５／０７／２８　１３：４７：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９３　

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. In these areas,accessories may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

280

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before

Driving

191

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０５／０７／２８　１３：４７：２７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９４　

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components withnon-Honda components couldseriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Lowering your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anon-Honda suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

192

０５／０７／２８　１３：４７：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９５　

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxDoor and seat-back pocketsTrunk, including the rear seatswhen folded downCenter pocketConsole compartmentRoof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Before

Driving

193

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

TRUNK GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKET

DOOR POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

０５／０７／２８　１３：４７：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９６　

－ ×

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (395 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, and accessories,and the tongue load if you are towinga trailer.

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedin the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity instep 4.

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.[The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb.]

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 pounds or 395 kilograms.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.For example, if the maximum loadis 850 lbs and there will be five 150lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 100 lbs.(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

213

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

194

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０５／０７／２８　１３：４７：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９７　

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all passengers, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). Bothare on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withproper operation of the pedals, thefront seats, or the advanced frontairbags.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop. 50

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Before

Driving

195

０５／０７／２８　１３：４８：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９８　

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.To use the cargo net, hook it to thebuttons on the floor and sides of thetrunk. You can use the cargo net inseveral configurations by hooking itto different buttons.

When you are not using the cargonet, store it in the spare tire well.

There are hooks on the floor andsides of the trunk. They can be usedto install a net for securing items.

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your dealerfor further information.

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.


Carrying Cargo

Cargo NetTrunk Hooks

196

０５／０７／２８　１３：４８：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０１９９　

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes importantinformation on parking your vehicle,the braking system, the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system, andfacts you need if you are planning totow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 198.......................Starting the Engine . 199

...................Manual Transmission . 200..............Automatic Transmission . 203

...........................................Parking . 207.............................Braking System . 208

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 209Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 211...........................Towing a Trailer . 213

Driving

Driving

197

０５／０７／２８　１３：４８：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２００　

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and thetrunk are securely closed andlocked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Check that the trunk is fullyclosed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

2.

1.

6.

7.

8.

9.

14

3.

4.

5.

10.

11.

55

95

82

73

Preparing to Drive

198

０５／０７／２８　１３：４８：３３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２０１　

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III)position for more than 15 secondsat a time. If the engine does notstart right away, pause for at least10 seconds before trying again.

1.

2.

3.

4. 5.

6.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

75

Starting the Engine

Driving

199

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

０５／０７／２８　１３：４８：４４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２０２　

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse.

On vehicles with 6-speed manualtransmission, the lockout systemprevents you from shifting directly

from fifth to reverse instead of sixth(see page ).

When shifting up or down, makesure you push the clutch pedal downall the way, shift to the next gear,and let the pedal up gradually. Whenyou are not shifting, do not rest yourfoot on the clutch pedal. This cancause your clutch to wear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won’t‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure the engine speed will notgo into the tachometer’s red zone inthe lower gear.

202On 4-cylinder models with 5-speedmanual transmissionOn EX-V6 model with 6-speed manualtransmission

Manual Transmission

200

5-speed M/T 6-speed M/T

０５／０７／２８　１３：４８：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２０３　

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (24 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (64 km/h)47 mph (75 km/h)52 mph (83 km/h)

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (25 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (65 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)

Your vehicle is equipped with analuminum shift lever. If you leave thevehicle parked outside for a longtime on a hot day, be careful beforemoving the shift lever. Because ofthe heat, the shift lever may beextremely hot. If the outsidetemperature is low, the shift leverfeels cold.

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you goodfuel economy and effectiveemissions control. The followingshift points are recommended:

On EX-V6 model

With 5-speed manual transmission

With 6-speed manual transmissionRecommended Shift Points

Manual Transmission

Driving

201

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

０５／０７／２８　１３：４９：０１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２０４　

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

The manual transmission haslockout so you cannot accidentallyshift from fifth to reverse instead ofsixth while the vehicle is moving. Ifyou cannot shift to reverse when thevehicle is stopped:

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the neutralgate, then shift to reverse.

If you are still unable to shift toreverse, apply the parking brake,and turn the ignition key to theACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)position.

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toreverse.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

6-speed manual transmission onlyEngine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout

Manual Transmission

202

０５／０７／２８　１３：４９：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２０５　

These indicators between the tacho-meter and speedometer show whichposition the shift lever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from any position to Park,press firmly on the brake pedal, andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever. You cannot shiftout of Park when the ignition switchis in the LOCK (0) or theACCESSORY(I) position.

CONTINUED

ShiftingShift Lever Position Indicators

Automatic Transmission

Driving

203

SHIFT LEVER

RELEASE BUTTON

０５／０７／２８　１３：４９：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２０６　

－

－－To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

3

3

3

3

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.

Press the brakepedal and press the release buttonon the front of the shift lever to shiftfrom Park to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.

206


Shift Lock Release

Neutral (N)

Park (P) Reverse (R)

204

０５／０７／２８　１３：４９：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２０７　

－

－

－

－

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Use second gear:For more power when climbing.To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

To help reduce wheel spin.

To shift to second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on thefront of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D , and D, you canoperate this transmission much likea manual transmission without aclutch pedal.

3

3 3


Engine Speed LimiterDrive (D)

Drive (D )

Second (2)

First (1)3

Driving

205

０５／０７／２８　１３：４９：４３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２０８　

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

Remove the key from the shiftlock release slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the left side. Press thebrake pedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

Put a cloth on the notch of theshift lock release slot cover. Usinga small flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

6.

Shift Lock Release


206

COVER

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

NOTCH

０５／０７／２８　１３：４９：５４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２０９　

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving

207

０５／０７／２８　１３：５０：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１０　

Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, increases wear, and reducestheir effectiveness. It also keepsyour brake lights on all the time,confusing drivers behind you.

The front and rear disc brakes on allmodels have audible brake wearindicators. All models except for the4-cylinder LX have rear disc brakesas standard equipment.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Braking System

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

208

０５／０７／２８　１３：５０：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１１　

CONTINUED

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as instructedon page .278

You should never pump the brake pedal.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

ABS Indicator

Driving

209

０５／０７／２８　１３：５０：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１２　

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

It only helps with thesteering control during braking.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down, and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

The VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

278

On all V6 models

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

210

０５／０７／２８　１３：５０：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１３　

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink.

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output,and by selectively applying thebrakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

Without VSA, your vehicle still hasnormal braking and cornering ability,but it does not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

On all V6 models

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Driving

211

０５／０７／２８　１３：５０：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１４　

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the VSA system onand off.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.Pressing the switch again turns thesystem back on.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

264

258

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA and Tire SizesVSA Off Switch

212

VSA OFF SWITCH

０５／０７／２８　１３：５０：５３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１５　

Your vehicle has been designed toprimarily carry passengers and theircargo. You can also use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetotal trailer weight. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control. Toolittle tongue load can make thetrailer unstable and cause it tosway.

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

Towing a Trailer

Driving

213

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５１：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１６　

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The maximum allowable weighton the vehicle axles is:

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, allaccessories, all cargo, and thetongue load is:

(LX)

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

(LX)

(EX, EX-L)

(EX, EX-L)

on the front axle

on the rear axle

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

Checking LoadsGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Towing a Trailer

214

2,195 lbs (995 kg)

1,960 lbs (890 kg)

2,360 lbs (1,070 kg)

2,005 lbs (910 kg)

4,080 lbs (1,850 kg)

4,125 lbs (1,870 kg)

4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)

2,225 lbs (1,010 kg)

1,985 lbs (900 kg)

０５／０７／２８　１３：５１：１２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１７　

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, howmuch load you are towing, andwhere you tow.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in this section. Also makesure that all equipment is properlyinstalled and maintained, and that itmeets federal, state, province, andlocal regulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, province,and local regulations. Check therequirements for the areas whereyou plan to tow, and use onlyequipment designed for your vehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Honda requires that any trailer witha total weight of 1,000 lbs (455 kg) ormore be equipped with its ownelectric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitches

Safety Chains

Trailer Brakes

Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving

215

０５／０７／２８　１３：５１：２７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１８　

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

Additional Towing Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

216

０５／０７／２８　１３：５１：３８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２１９　

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). Athigher speeds, the trailer may swayor affect vehicle handling. If youhave an automatic transmission, useD position when towing a trailer onlevel roads.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

3

CONTINUED

Making Turns and Braking

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving on Hills

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing a Trailer

Driving

217

０５／０７／２８　１３：５１：５１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２０　

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin first or reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

bottom

Backing Up

Parking

Towing a Trailer

218

０５／０７／２８　１３：５１：５８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２１　

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages in theinformation display, a maintenancerecord, and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 220....................Maintenance Minder . 221....................Maintenance Record . 228

..............................Fluid Locations . 230........................Adding Engine Oil . 232

.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 233..............................Engine Coolant . 236

....................Windshield Washers . 238.......................Transmission Fluid . 239

..........Automatic Transmission . 239..............Manual Transmission . 242

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 243....................Power Steering Fluid . 245

....................................Timing Belt . 246.............................................Lights . 246

................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 251.....................................Floor Mats . 251

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 252.................................Wiper Blades . 252

...............................................Tires . 254...................Checking the Battery . 260

.............................Vehicle Storage . 262

305

Maintenance

Maintenance

219

０５／０７／２８　１３：５２：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２２　

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Maintenance Safety


Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

220

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５２：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２３　

－－－－－－－－－－－－

CONTINUED

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)100 % 91 %90 % 81 %80 % 71 %70 % 61 %60 % 51 %50 % 41 %40 % 31 %30 % 21 %20 % 16 %15 % 11 %10 % 6 %5 % 1 %

0 %

DisplayedEngine Oil Life (%)

100 %90 %80 %70 %60 %50 %40 %30 %20 %15 %10 %5 %0 %

Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items in theinformation display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.

Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and press the Select/Reset knob repeatedly until theengine oil life display appears (seepage ).

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed on the engine oil lifedisplay according to this table:

63

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Display

Maintenance

221

ENGINE OIL LIFEDISPLAY

SELECT/RESETKNOB

０５／０７／２８　１３：５２：２９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２４　

The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page ).

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ messagealong with the same maintenanceitem code(s), every time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayednext to the engine oil life indicator.

227

Maintenance Minder

222

MAINTENANCEITEM CODE(S)

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR

０５／０７／２８　１３：５２：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２５　

－

If you still do not perform theindicated maintenance, you will see anegative mileage. It is displayedwhen you drive over 10 miles (forU.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadianmodels) after seeing the 0 percentmessage. Afterward, it shows yourdriving distance if you continue todrive. Immediately have theindicated maintenance done by yourdealer.

The maximum total mileage shownis ‘‘ 9999.’’

You can change the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer, the tripmeter, or the outside temperature (ifequipped) every time you press andrelease the Select/Reset knob.

When the engine oil life display is 0percent or negative mileage, themaintenance minder indicatorremains on even if you change theinformation display.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described in the nextpage.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill be blinking. The display comeson every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Whenyou see this message, have theindicated maintenance performed byyour dealer as soon as possible.

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

223

０５／０７／２８　１３：５２：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２６　

All maintenance items displayed inthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page .

Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

Press the Select/Reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifedisplay is displayed.

Press the Select/Reset knob formore than 10 seconds. The engineoil life indicator and themaintenance item code(s) willblink.

1.

2.

3.

227

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplay

224

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM

０５／０７／２８　１３：５２：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２７　

If you have the required servicedone but do not reset the display, orreset the display without doing theservice, the system will not show theproper maintenance intervals. Thiscan lead to serious mechanicalproblems because you will no longerhave an accurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.

Press the Select/Reset knob formore than 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘100.’’

However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

4.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Important MaintenancePrecautions

Maintenance

225

０５／０７／２８　１３：５３：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２８　

＃

－

－

－

－

－

－U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by theinformation display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

188

189

239

244

256

246

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

226

０５／０７／２８　１３：５３：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２２９　

＃

＃

－

＃

Maintenance Minder

227

:

If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months afterthe display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Independent of the maintenance minder display, replace the brake fluidevery 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

NOTE:

1 :

226

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect these items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and line (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in highertransmission and transfer temperatures. Thisrequires transmission and transfer fluid changesmore frequently than recommended by themaintenance minder. If you regularly drive yourvehicle under these conditions, have thetransmission and transfer fluid changed at60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles(48,000 km). (For A/T only:)

Replace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump(V6 engine only)

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures(under 110°F, 29°C), replace every 60,000 mile(U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).

Inspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

1

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

０５／０７／２８　１３：５３：２７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３０　

Maintenance Record

228

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

０５／０７／２８　１３：５３：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３１　

Maintenance Record

Maintenance

229

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5


A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

０５／０７／２８　１３：５３：４２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３２　

4-cylinder Models

Fluid Locations

230

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed manualtransmission only)(Light gray cap)

０５／０７／２８　１３：５３：４８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３３　

6-cylinder Models

Fluid Locations

Maintenance

231

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

CLUTCH FLUID(6-speed manualtransmission only)(Gray cap)

０５／０７／２８　１３：５３：５４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３４　

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Install the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil

232

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder modelsENGINE OIL FILL CAP

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

０５／０７／２８　１３：５４：０２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３５　

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

1.

CONTINUED

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance

233

Ambient Temperature

０５／０７／２８　１３：５４：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３６　

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Check the oil filter to make sureits gasket did not stick to theengine block. A stuck gasket couldcause an oil leak.

4.3.2.


234

4-cylinder models

OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLTWASHER OIL FILTER

4-cylinder models6-cylinder models

WASHER

０５／０７／２８　１３：５４：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３７　

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

9.

8.

7.

6.

5.

10.


Maintenance

235

OIL FILTER

6-cylinder models

33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５４：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３８　

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolant

recommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

236

6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５４：５０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２３９　

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

4.

1. 3.

2.

5.

CONTINUED

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

237

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR CAP

4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

０５／０７／２８　１３：５５：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４０　

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page ).

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

60

On Canadian models:

Windshield Washers

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

238

6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK

LEVEL GAUGE

4-cylinder models

０５／０７／２８　１３：５５：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４１　

CONTINUED

4-cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the notch in the rubbercap fits in the dipstick guide andthat you push the dipstick in allthe way.

1.

2.

3.


Windshield Washers, Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

239

6-cylinder models

LEVEL GAUGE

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICKGUIDE

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５５：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４２　

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the upper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the notch fits in thedipstick guide and the dipstick isdown all the way.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

5.

4. 6.

1.

2.

6-cylinder models

Transmission Fluid


240

DIPSTICK

０５／０７／２８　１３：５５：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４３　

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the upper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

Make sure the notch fits in thedipstick guide and the dipstick isdown all the way.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

Make sure the notch in the rubbercap fits in the dipstick guide andthat you push the dipstick in allthe way.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

241

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０５／０７／２８　１３：５５：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４４　

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehiclesitting on level ground. Removethe transmission filler bolt, andcarefully feel inside the bolt holewith your finger.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground.

The fluid level should be up to theedge of the bolt hole. If it is not, addHonda Manual Transmission Fluid(MTF) until it starts to run out of thehole. Reinstall the filler bolt, andtighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer. Remove the check bolt and look for

transmission fluid coming out of thebolt hole. If a small amount of fluiddrips out of the bolt hole, reinstallthe check bolt.

On 4-cylinder models On EX-V6 model

Transmission Fluid

Manual Transmission Manual Transmission

242

FILLER BOLT

Correct level

CHECK BOLT

WASHER

DRAIN BOLT

０５／０７／２８　１３：５５：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４５　

CONTINUED

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt. Slowly add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the check bolthole. Let the fluid run out until itstops, then reinstall the check boltand the filler bolt.

Pour the fluid into the filler holeslowly and carefully so you do notspill. Clean up any spill immediately;it could damage components in theengine compartment.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)

Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoir monthly.Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance minder schedule.

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance

243

FILLER BOLT

WASHER

０５／０７／２８　１３：５６：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４６　

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Manual Transmission only

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Brake System Clutch System

244

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

０５／０７／２８　１３：５６：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４７　

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Power Steering Fluid

Maintenance

245

UPPER LEVEL

4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

6-cylinder models

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５６：３０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４８　

－－

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be done by your dealer orother qualified mechanic.

Open the hood. To change a bulbon the driver’s side, undo the twofasteners and remove the airintake cover.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

If you frequently tow a trailer.

Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your vehicle in one ormore of these conditions:

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance minder schedule.

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).

In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

1.

6-cylinder models only

Timing Belt, Lights

Headlight Aiming

Replacing a Headlight Bulb

Timing Belt High Beam Headlight

246

FASTENERS AIR INTAKECOVER

4-cylinder models

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５６：４４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２４９　

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Reinstall the air intake cover.Reinstall the two fasteners andsecure them by pushing on theheads until they lock.

(Driver’s side)

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Lights

Maintenance

247

6-cylinder models

FASTENERS

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder modelsTAB BULB TAB

BULB

AIR INTAKECOVER

０５／０７／２８　１３：５６：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５０　

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

To change the low beam headlightbulb on the driver’s side, removethe air intake duct. You can reachthe air intake duct from the backside of the inner fender.

6.

5.4.

1.

2.

3.


Low Beam Headlight

Lights

248

AIR INTAKE DUCT

EX-V6 with M/T

HOLDING CLIPS

０５／０７／２８　１３：５７：０７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５１　

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Install the new bulb, and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the air intake ductsecurely.

(Driver’s side)

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

1.

3.

2.

4.

9.

7.

8.

11.

10.

CONTINUED


Replacing a Front Side Marker/Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb

Lights

Maintenance

249

HOLDING CLIPS

０５／０７／２８　１３：５７：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５２　

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning the bulb counterclockwiseuntil it unlocks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

Open the trunk.

Remove the light assembly coverby pulling its outside edge.

Determine which bulb is burnedout: turn signal or back-up light.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Install the light assembly cover.Make sure it snaps into place.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Replacing Rear Bulbs

Lights

250

COVER

０５／０７／２８　１３：５７：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５３　

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

The driver’s and the right-rearpassenger’s floor mats that camewith your vehicle hook over the floormat anchors. This keeps the floormat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedalsor making the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

CONTINUED

Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Maintenance

251

LOOP

０５／０７／２８　１３：５７：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５４　

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

If you remove the floor mats, makesure to re-anchor them when you putthem back in your vehicle.

If you use non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of an anchored mat.

Make sure the right-rear floor mat isproperly hooked to the floor matanchor. Your vehicle is equippedwith front passenger’s seat weightsensors. If the right-rear passenger’sfloor mat is on the seat rail of thefront passenger’s seat, the sensorswill detect the decreased weight onthe seat and they may not workproperly.

Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if airflow from theheating and cooling system/climatecontrol system becomes less thanusual. Have the dust and pollen filterreplaced by your dealer.

Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades

Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades

252

０５／０７／２８　１３：５７：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５５　

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

2.

1.

3.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

Maintenance

253

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB BLADE

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the wiper arms.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５８：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５６　

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger’sside first, then the driver’s side.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades, Tires

Tires

254

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５８：１３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５７　

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at least 3hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km). Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on page .

If you check air pressure when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should use your own tirepressure gauge whenever you checkyour tire pressures. This will make iteasier for you to tell if a pressureloss is due to a tire problem and notdue to a variation between gauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

256

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

Maintenance

255

０５／０７／２８　１３：５８：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５８　

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional information aboutyour tires, see page .296

Tire Size/Type

Compact Spare

Cold Tire Pressure

Tire Size/Type

Compact Spare

Cold Tire Pressure

Tire Size/Type

Compact Spare

Cold Tire Pressure

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

6-cylinder models

Canadian 4-cylinder LX models

All 4-cylinder models except CanadianLX

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tire Inspection

256

P205/65R15 92H30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa ,4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )


32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )


P205/60R16 91V

P215/50R17 93V

０５／０７／２８　１３：５８：４２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２５９　

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread lefton the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display. Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated. Ifyou purchase directional tires, rotateonly front-to-back.

For vehicles with aluminum wheels:

Tires

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

Maintenance

257

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５９：０３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６０　

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system toactivate.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading, and page

for tire size and labelinginformation.

294

296


6-cylinder models

6-cylinder models


All models except Canadian 4-cylinderLX

All 4-cylinder models except CanadianLX

Replacing Tires and Wheels Wheel and Tire Specifications

Tires

258

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

15 x 6 1/2 JJ

17 x 6 1/2 JJ

P205/60R16 91V

P205/65R15 92H

P215/50R17 93VInstalling improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５９：１８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６１　

＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

These chains are the only ones thathave been approved by Honda foruse on your vehicle. Since Hondacannot test all chains, you must bepersonally responsible for properselection, installation, and use of tirechains.

The chains listed here are availableat many auto supply stores. For acomplete list of stores, visit the SCCwebsite at www.scc-chain.com.When installing chains, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with chains installed.

Cable-types: CH2412T

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134

Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

CONTINUED

LX

EX and EX-L

LX-V6 and EX-V6

Tires

Winter Driving

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Maintenance

259

０５／０７／２８　１３：５９：３０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６２　

If you ever hear the chainscontacting the body or chassis, stopand investigate. If the chains haveloosened, retighten them. Make surethey do not contact the brake linesor suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as youbegin driving on cleared roads.

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

Checking the Battery

Tires, Checking the Battery

260

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

4-cylinder models

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

6-cylinder models

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５９：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６３　

－

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Checking the Battery

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Maintenance

261

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

０５／０７／２８　１３：５９：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６４　

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Vehicle Storage

262

０５／０７／２８　１４：００：００　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６５　

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 264....................Changing a Flat Tire . 265

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 270................................Jump Starting . 272

..............If the Engine Overheats . 274.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 276..........Charging System Indicator . 276

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 277...............Brake System Indicator . 278

..................Closing the Moonroof . 279..............................................Fuses . 280

..............................Fuse Locations . 283......................Emergency Towing . 285

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

263

０５／０７／２８　１４：００：０５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６６　

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Follow these precautions:

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer. Replace the tire when you can see

the tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Turn off the VSA system (seepages and ). Driving withthe compact spare tire mayactivate the VSA.

211 212

On all V6 models

Compact Spare Tire

264

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０５／０７／２８　１４：００：１９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６７　

CONTINUED

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (A/T) orReverse (M/T). Apply the parkingbrake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

The tools are in the trunk. Openthe trunk and raise the trunk floorby lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

265

TRUNK FLOOR

SPARE TIRE JACKTOOL KIT

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０５／０７／２８　１４：００：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６８　

The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

6. 7. 8.


266

JACK

WHEEL NUT

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

０５／０７／２８　１４：００：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２６９　

CONTINUED

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

9. 10.

11.

On Canadian 4-cylinder LX model


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

267

JACKING POINT

WHEEL COVER

WHEEL NUTSWHEEL NUT WRENCH EXTENSION

０５／０７／２８　１４：００：５１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７０　

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

13. 14.12.


268

BRAKE HUB

０５／０７／２８　１４：００：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７１　

CONTINUED

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.

Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

15. 16. 17.

18.

19.

All models except Canadian 4-cylinderLX


Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

269

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

Forsparetire

Fornormaltire

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

０５／０７／２８　１４：０１：１０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７２　

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Lower the trunk floor, then closethe trunk lid.

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound or series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

20.

21.

22.

272

If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start

270

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０１：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７３　

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem (see

on page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

59

199

280

285

285

272

260

If the Engine Won’t Start

EmergencyTowing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

Emergency Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

271

０５／０７／２８　１４：０１：３５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７４　

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

To jump start your vehicle:

The numbers in the illustrationsshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set theparking brake.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

Jump Starting

272

4-cylinder models

BOOSTERBATTERY

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０１：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７５　

－＋

＋

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourvehicle’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

6.

5.

4.3.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

273

6-cylinder models4-cylinder models6-cylinder models

BOOSTERBATTERY

０５／０７／２８　１４：０１：５９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７６　

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,and then from the booster battery.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.If it climbs to the red mark, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set theparking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

2.

1.

7.

Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats

If the Engine Overheats

274

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０２：０９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７７　

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of thetemperature gauge or lowerbefore checking the radiator.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

Start the engine, and set thetemperature to maximum heat(climate control to AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

3.

4.

5.

285285

If the Engine Overheats

EmergencyTowingEmergency

Towing

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

275

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０２：２２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７８　

This indicator should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

1.

2.

3.

4.

188

232

285

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Emergency Towing

Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

276

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０２：３４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２７９　

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If your vehicle battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes at leastthree days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks 5 times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

This indicator may also come on withthe ‘‘D’’ indicator.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may turn off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once (seepage ). Tightening the cap willnot turn the indicator offimmediately; it takes several days

of normal driving.

300186

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

StateEmissions Testing

Readiness Codes

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

277

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and the engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０２：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８０　

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

The brake system indicator normallycomes on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position and asa reminder to check the parkingbrake. It will stay on if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

244

285

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

278

U.S. Canada

０５／０７／２８　１４：０２：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８１　

If you need to close the moonroofmanually, it means the moonroofopening/closing function isdeveloping a problem. Have yourvehicle checked by your dealer.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

To remove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner, turn theplug by using a screwdriver orcoin, then pry it out. Make sure toalign the tabs on the round plug tothe notches on the ceiling asshown in the illustration.

If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind the plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

4.

3.

1.

2.

5.

6.

284

If equipped

Closing the Moonroof

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

279

SOCKET

ROUND PLUG

TAB

NOTCH

MOONROOF WRENCH

０５／０７／２８　１４：０３：０６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８２　

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that device. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isthe cause. Replace any blown fuses,and check if the device works.

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.The interior fuse box is on the

driver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, put your finger inthe notch on the lid, and pull itupward slightly, then pull it towardyou and take it out of its hinges.

The vehicle’s fuses are contained intwo fuse boxes.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

1.

2.

283 284

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

280

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

TAB

NOTCH

０５／０７／２８　１４：０３：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８３　

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each one with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the side windowat the wire inside. Removing thesefuses requires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

3. 4.

CONTINUED

Fuses

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

281

BLOWN BLOWNFUSE FUSE PULLER

０５／０７／２８　１４：０３：２６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８４　

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO function of thedriver’s window will be disabled. Toreset the AUTO function, see page

.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself.The next time you turn on theradio you will see ‘‘CODE/COdE’’in the frequency display. Use thepreset bars to enter the code (seepage ).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.5.

6.

92

172

Fuses

282

BLOWNFUSE

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０３：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８５　

－

－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＋

＊＊＊

No. Amps.

CONTINUED

Amps. Circuits Protected

Amps.No. Circuits Protected

No. Circuits Protected

1: All except U.S. 4-cylinder LX model2: 4-cylinder models3: 6-cylinder models

6789

10

10 A7.5 A15 A20 A

10 A30 A10 A15 A10 A

Right Headlight Low BeamBack UpFI ECU (ECM/PCM)Condenser FanNot Used

20 A30 A7.5 A20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A30 A20 A40 A40 A40 A40 A

100 A

50 A50 A

11

121314151617

18

19202122

23

Cooling FanCooling FanMG. ClutchHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardABS MotorVSA MotorABS UnitVSA UnitOptionOptionHeater MotorBatteryNot Used

B IG1 MainPower Window Main

12345

Left Headlight Low BeamRear Defroster CoilLeft Headlight High BeamSmall LightRight Headlight High Beam

2

3

2

3

2

3

1

1

Fuse Locations

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

283

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

０５／０７／２８　１４：０３：４６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８６　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

No. Amps.No.

No.

Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected

Amps. Circuits Protected

: All except 4-cylinder LX model

1234567

20 A15 A7.5 A

30 A

89

10

111213

141516

1718192021222324252627282930313233

15 A15 A10 A15 A10 A7.5 A10 A

Door LockFront Accessory SocketsOPDS (Occupant PositionDetection System)IG WiperNot UsedNot Used

DBWIgnition CoilDaytime Running LightLaf HeaterRadioInterior LightBack Up

20 A20 A20 A

15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A

20 A20 A20 A

7.5 A

7.5 A

Driver’s Power Seat SlidingHeated SeatsDriver’s Power SeatRecliningNot UsedACGFuel PumpWasherMeterSRSIGPNot UsedNot UsedPassenger’s Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedA/CNot UsedACCNot Used

Fuse Locations

284

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０５／０７／２８　１４：０３：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８７　

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to neutral.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:

With the front wheels on the ground,do not tow the vehicle more than 50miles (80 km), and keep the speedbelow 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front) and lift themoff the ground. The other two tiresremain on the ground.

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

CONTINUED

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Emergency Towing

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way to trans-port your vehicle.

This is anacceptable way to tow yourvehicle.

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

285

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thef ront wheels of f the ground.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０４：１５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８８　

Emergency Towing

286

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns f reely bef ore you begintowing.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０４：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２８９　

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 288Specifications

..................(4-cylinder Models) . 290Specifications

..................(6-cylinder Models) . 292DOT Tire Quality Grading

.....................(U. S. Vehicles) . 294Uniform Tire Quality

..................................Grading . 294.................................Treadwear . 294

......................................Traction . 294.............................Temperature . 295

.................................Tire Labeling . 296

.......................Emissions Controls . 297.....................The Clean Air Act . 297

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 297

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 297

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 297

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 298....................PGM-FI System . 298

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 298

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 298

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 298

....................Replacement Parts . 298..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 299

..............State Emissions Testing . 300

Technical Information

TechnicalInform

ation

287

０５／０７／２８　１４：０４：２５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９０　

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

288

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０５／０７／２８　１４：０４：３１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９１　

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication Numbers

TechnicalInform

ation

289

AUTOMATIC/MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER6-cylinder Models

MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER

ENGINE NUMBER

4-cylinder ModelsAUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

０５／０７／２８　１４：０４：３７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９２　

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications (4-cylinder Models)

290

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

187.8 in (4,770 mm)71.3 in (1,810 mm)55.7 in (1,415 mm)105.1 in (2,670 mm)61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)

1.88 US gal (7.1 )1.90 US gal (7.2 )

1.32 US gal (5.0 )1.35 US gal (5.1 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )HFC-134a (R-134a)

17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

ND-OIL8 2.0 US qt (1.9 )2.2 US qt (2.1 )3.0 US qt (2.8 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission fluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotalChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1

2

０５／０７／２８　１４：０４：５６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９３　

－

－－－

－－－－－－－－

－－

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊


TechnicalInform

ation

291

EngineLights

Battery

Fuses

Alignment

Tires

12 V 24/2.2 CP

12 V12 V

60 W (HB3)51 W (HB4)

12 V 21 W

3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)144 cu-in (2,354 cm )

9.7 : 1

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking/sidemarker lightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsSpotlights

12 V 18 W12 V 3 CP12 V 8 W12 V 5 W12 V 2 CP12 V 1.1 W12 V 8 W

Capacity 12 V 38 AH/5 HR12 V 47 AH/20 HR

Interior

Under-hood

Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC i-VTEC4-cylinder gasoline engine

See page 284 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid.See page 283 or the fuse boxcover.

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

T135/90D15 100M

P205/60R16 91VP205/65R15 92H

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

3°15’1°

0°0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

NGK:

DENSO:SKJ20DRM13SKJ20DRM11IZFR6K13IZFR6K11

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

Front/Rear

SpareFront

Rear

Spare

4 : Canadian LX models

2 : Californian models with automatic transmission1 : All models except Californian models with automatic transmission

3 : All models except Canadian LX

3

4

3

4

3

4

1

2

1

2

０５／０７／２８　１４：０５：２４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９４　

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊


292

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)

17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)HFC-134a (R-134a)

ND-OIL8

2.6 US qt (2.5 )4.8 US qt (4.5 )

7.6 US qt (7.2 )3.1 US qt (2.9 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

1.77 US gal (6.7 )

2.22 US gal (8.4 )

105.1 in (2,670 mm) 1.74 US gal (6.6 )

187.8 in (4,770 mm)71.3 in (1,810 mm)55.8 in (1,418 mm)

2.17 US gal (8.2 )

2.3 US qt (2.2 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

ManualtransmissionfluidAutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

FrontRear

Approx.

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1

2

０５／０７／２８　１４：０５：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９５　

－

＊＊

－－－

－－－－－－－－

－－

＊

＊


TechnicalInform

ation

293

Engine

Alignment

Lights

Battery

Fuses

Tires

12 V12 V12 V

12 V

51 W (HB4)24/2.2 CP

21 W3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)

183 cu-in (2,997 cm )10.0 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°1°

3°15’

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC

6-cylinder gasoline engine

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

NGK:DENSO:

IZFR6K11SKJ20DRM11

Headlights

Front turn signal/parking/sidemarker lightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsSpotlights

12 V 18 W12 V 3 CP12 V 8 W12 V 5 W12 V 2 CP12 V 1.1 W12 V 8 W

Capacity12 V12 V

65 AH/20 HR52 AH/5 HR

Interior

Under-hood

P215/50R17 93VSize

Pressure

T135/90D15 100MT135/80R16 101M

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

See page 284 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox lid.See page 283 or the fuse boxcover.

60 W (HB3)

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

1 :2 :

LX-V6, EX-V6 with automatic transmissionEX-V6 with manual transmission

Front/RearSpare

FrontRearSpare

1

2

０５／０７／２８　１４：０６：０５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９６　

－

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

294

０５／０７／２８　１４：０６：１６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９７　

－The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. GradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance that all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C

TechnicalInform

ation

295

０５／０７／２８　１４：０６：２１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９８　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Date of manufacture.

The maximum airpressure the tire canhold.

The maximum loadthe tire can carry atmaximum airpressure.

Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like this example:

P

R

V

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

205

60

91Max Press

Max Load

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

296

P205/60R16 91V

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

０５／０７／２８　１４：０６：４０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０２９９　

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons.Controlling the production of NOx,CO, and HC is important to theenvironment. Under certainconditions of sunlight and climate,NOx and HC react to formphotochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positivecrankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to the

intake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Emissions Controls

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

TechnicalInform

ation

297

０５／０７／２８　１４：０６：５１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３００　

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. It

then controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are

designed and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Ignition Timing Control System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

298

０５／０７／２８　１４：０７：０４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３０１　

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

TechnicalInform

ation

299

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

０５／０７／２８　１４：０７：１４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３０２　

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes.Drive on the highway in D (A/T)

or fifth/sixth (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

300

０５／０７／２８　１４：０７：２５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３０３　

Customer Service................................Information . 302

....................Warranty Coverages . 303Reporting Safety Defects

...........................(U.S. vehicles) . 304.....................Authorized Manuals . 305

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

301

０５／０７／２８　１４：０７：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３０４　

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle identification number (seepage )

Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Mileage on your vehicle

Your name, address, andtelephone number

A detailed description of theproblem

Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

288

Customer Service Information

302

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7028

０５／０７／２８　１４：０７：３９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３０５　

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2006 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2006 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

303

０５／０７／２８　１４：０７：５２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３０６　

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400Seventh Street, SW., Washington,D.C. 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

304

０５／０７／２８　１４：０７：５７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３０７　

－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００６

ＨＯＮ

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm

Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

305

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Publication

Form Number

61SDA08

61SDA09

61SDA08EL

61SDA30

31SDN630

31SDA730

31SDAM10

31SDNQ30

HON-R

Form Description

2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4

Service Manual Base Book

2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6

Service Manual Supplement

2006 Honda Accord Navigation System

Owner’s Manual

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Price

Each

$75.00

$45.00

$50.00

$44.00

$35.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4/V6

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4/V6

Body Repair Manual

2006 Honda Accord 2 door Owner’s Manual

2006 Honda Accord Honda Service History

2006 Honda Accord 2-door Quick Start Guide

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

０５／０７／２８　１４：０８：１１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３０８　

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

306

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

０５／０７／２８　１４：０８：２３　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３０９　

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 57, 276............................Jump Starting . 272

..............................Maintenance . 260....................Specifications . 291, 293

..............................Before Driving . 183....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 17

...........................Beverage Holders . 98..................................Booster Seats . 47

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 209

.............Break-in, New Linings . 184...........................................Fluid . 243

.........................................Parking . 96..........................System Design . 208

.................System Indicator . 58, 278........................Wear Indicators . 208

.............................Braking System . 208.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 184

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 71........................Brights, Headlights . 69

....................................Accessories . 191ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 76............Accessory Power Sockets . 100

................Adding Engine Coolant . 236Additional Information About Your

.........................................Airbags . 21....................Additives, Engine Oil . 233

.......Adjusting the Steering Wheel . 73...........................Advanced Airbags . 25

.........Advice for Pregnant Women . 15...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21

..............Air Conditioning System . 106.........................Manual System . 108

.....................Automatic System . 113Automatic System with

.................navigation system . 117.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 256.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 184

All Children Should Sit in a.....................................Back Seat . 33

......................................Antifreeze . 236Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 59, 209

...................................Operation . 209..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 172

.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 76............................................Armrest . 85

................................Audio System . 124.................AM/FM/CD Player . 126

.............AM/FM/CD Changer . 136AM/FM/CD Changer with

.................navigation system . 149...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 70...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19

..Automatic Climate Control . 113, 117.............Automatic Speed Control . 175..............Automatic Transmission . 203

..................Capacity, Fluid . 290, 292.......Checking Fluid Level . 239, 240

.......................................Shifting . 203Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 203................Shift Lever Positions . 204

....................Shift Lock Release . 206

Index

A B

IND

EX

I

０５／０７／２８　１４：０８：２９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１０　

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 3, 54

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 250

................Front Parking Lights . 249.................................Headlights . 246

....................Specifications . 291, 293............Turn Signal Lights . 249, 250

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 246

...................Capacities Chart . 290, 292.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 50

....................Cargo, How to Carry . 193......................................Cargo Net . 196

.............................Carrying Cargo . 193..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

.........................................CD Care . 169...........................CD Changer .141, 155

CD Changer Error....................Messages .133, 146, 160

.......................................CD Player . 129.........CD Player Error Messages . 132

...........................Center CD Pocket . 99........................Certification Label . 288

.................................Chains, Tires . 259....................Changing a Flat Tire . 265

Changing Oil........................................How to . 233......................................When to . 221

...Charging System Indicator . 57, 276..............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65............Checklist, Before Driving . 198

.....................................Child Safety . 32..............................Booster Seats . 47

.............................Child Seats . 32, 39Important Safety

.........................Reminders . 32, 37..........................................Infants . 37

..........................Larger Children . 46.........................................LATCH . 41

......................Risks with Airbags . 33.............................Small Children . 38

.........................................Tethers . 45.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 33

.......................................Child Seats . 39......................................Installing . 40

.........................................LATCH . 41......................................Selecting . 39

................Tether Anchor Points . 45Cleaning

...................................Seat Belts . 251.......Climate Control System . 113, 117

..............................................Clock . 173...................................Clutch Fluid . 244

........................CO in the Exhaust . 297...................................Coin Pocket . 100

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 199......................Compact Spare Tire . 264

...................Console Compartment . 99

.................Consumer Information . 302.............Controls, Instruments and . 53

Coolant........................................Adding . 236

....................................Checking . 189.........................Proper Solution . 236

...................Temperature Gauge . 64Crankcase Emissions Control

........................................System . 297................Cruise Control Indicator . 62............Cruise Control Operation . 175

....................Cruise Main Indicator . 62.....................................Cup Holders . 98

....Customer Service Information . 302

Index

C

D

II

０５／０７／２８　１４：０８：３６　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１１　

＊

..............................Economy, Fuel . 190..................................Emergencies . 263

.............Battery, Jump Starting . 272...........Brake System Indicator . 278

................Changing a Flat Tire . 265.....Charging System Indicator . 276

..................Checking the Fuses . 280.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 71

............................Jump Starting . 272.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 276...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 277...Manually Closing Moonroof . 279

..................Overheated Engine . 274.......................................Towing . 285

...........................Emergency Brake . 96......................Emergency Flashers . 71

......................Emergency Towing . 285............Emergency Trunk Opener . 81

.......................Emissions Controls . 297.............Emissions Testing, State . 300

Engine............Adding Engine Coolant . 236

....................................Additives . 233.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 233

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 64.........................If It Won’t Start . 270

Malfunction Indicator......................................Lamp . 277

.........................Oil Life Display . 221........Oil Pressure Indicator . 57, 276

.............................Oil, Synthetic . 233..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 232

...............................Overheating . 274....................Specifications . 291, 293....................Speed Limiter . 202, 205

.......................................Starting . 199..........Engine Speed Limiter . 202, 205

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 184.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 297

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 50Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 15

................Daytime Running Lights . 70Daytime Running Lights

.......................................Indicator . 60.................................Dead Battery . 272

............Defects, Reporting Safety . 304................Defogger, Rear Window . 72

Defrosting the....................Windows . 111, 115, 120............................Dimensions . 290, 292

...............Dimming the Headlights . 69Dipstick

.Automatic Transmission . 239, 240..........................Engine Oil . 188, 189

..........................Directional Signals . 69........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 208

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 235....Door and Trunk Open Monitor . 61

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 77

......................Power Door Locks . 77........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 294

Downshifting, Manual.............................Transmission . 200

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 197

....................................Economy . 190

..........Dual Temperature Control . 121..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 252

Index

IND

EX

E

III

０５／０７／２８　１４：０８：４１　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１２　

...................Fan Control . 108, 114, 119.........................................Features . 105

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 185Filters

.........................Dust and Pollen . 252...............................................Oil . 233

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 71...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 265

Fluids.Automatic Transmission . 239, 240

..........................................Brake . 243.........................................Clutch . 244

..............Manual Transmission . 242..........................Power Steering . 245

..................Windshield Washer . 238...........................Folding Rear Seat . 88..........................Four-way Flashers . 71

........................Front Airbags . 9, 21, 23..................................Front Seat . 82, 84................................Adjusting . 82, 84

.........................................Heaters . 90

.....................................Airbags . 9, 23.................................................Fuel . 184

..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65

......................Fill Door and Cap . 185...........................................Gauge . 64

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60................Octane Requirement . 184

...............................Oxygenated . 184........................Tank, Refueling . 185

...............................Fuel Economy . 190..............................Fuse Locations . 283

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 280

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 190..........................................Gasohol . 184.........................................Gasoline . 184...........................................Gauge . 64

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60................Octane Requirement . 184

........................Tank, Refueling . 185................Gas Station Procedures . 185

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 64

...............................................Fuel . 64...............................Speedometer . 63

.................................Tachometer . 63

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 203

..............Manual Transmission . 200........................................Glove Box . 98

Gross Axle Weight Rating.....................................(GAWR) . 214

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.....................................(GVWR) . 214

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 246..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 71

........................................Headlights . 69........................................Aiming . 246

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 70............Daytime Running Lights . 70

..................High Beam Indicator . 60....................Lights On Indicator . 60

............Low Beams, Turning on . 69.........................Reminder Chime . 69

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 246...................................Turning on . 69

..............................Head Restraints . 87.....................Heating and Cooling . 106

...............................Heated Mirrors . 96

Index

GH

F

IV

０５／０７／２８　１４：０８：４７　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１３　

＊＊

..................................................Keys . 74

.....................................Heater, Seat . 90.............High Altitude, Starting at . 199

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 178

..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 186..................................................Horn . 67

...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 244

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 267.......................................Jack, Tire . 266

................................Jump Starting . 272

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 288..............If the Engine Overheats . 274.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 270

Ignition..............................................Keys . 74

...........................................Switch . 76............Timing Control System . 298

........................Immobilizer System . 75.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

...................................Indicators . 55, 56.......ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 59, 209

Brake (Parking and Brake............................System) . 58, 278

................Charging System . 57, 276...........................Check Fuel Cap . 65

.............................Cruise Control . 62

................Door and Trunk Open . 61DRL (Daytime Running

......................................Lights) . 60...................................High Beam . 60

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 59.....................................Lights On . 60......................................Low Fuel . 60

................Low Oil Pressure . 57, 276..................Maintenance Minder . 61

..............Malfunction Lamp . 57, 277.................Passenger Airbag Off . 29

.................Seat Belt Remider . 17, 57..........................Security System . 61...........................Side Airbag Off . 58

...............................................SRS . 58Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 59VSA (Vehicle Stability

..............................Assist) . 62, 211..........................Washer Level . 60

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 57...............................Infant Restraint . 37

......................................Infant Seats . 37...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 255

........Recommended Pressures . 256

........................Information Display . 63...........................Check Fuel Cap . 65

..........................Engine Oil Life . 221...................Maintenance Items . 224

.....................................Odometer . 63.................Outside Temperature . 65

.....................................Tripmeter . 64...................................Inside Mirror . 95

.............................Inspection, Tire . 256....................Installing a Child Seat . 40

............................Instrument Panel . 55........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71

..............Instruments and Controls . 53...............................Interior Lights . 102

........................................Introduction . i

Index

J

K

I

IND

EX

V

０５／０７／２８　１４：０８：５５　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１４　

.....................................Net, Cargo . 196...................Neutral Gear Position . 204..................New Vehicle Break-in . 184

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 201...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 288

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 184.........................................Odometer . 63

Oil........................Change, How to . 233......................Change, When to . 221......................Checking Engine . 188..............Pressure Indicator . 57, 276

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 233

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 76Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 297..............................Outside Mirrors . 95

.......................Label, Certification . 288.................Lane Change, Signaling . 69

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 17...........LATCH Anchorage System . 41

..Lighting Off Feature, Automatic . 70Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 246.................................Indicator . 55, 56

.........................................Parking . 69..................................Turn Signal . 69

....................................Load Limits . 194......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 76

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 76

............................Fuel Fill Door . 185....................................Glove Box . 98

.................................Power Door . 77...........................................Trunk . 81

................Low Coolant Level . 189, 236.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 60

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 57, 276................................Lower Anchors . 41

Lubricant Specifications..................................Chart . 290, 292

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 193

...........Luggage Net (Cargo Net) . 196

..................................Maintenance . 219Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 226........................................Record . 228.................................Minder . 66, 221

.........................Minder Indicator . 61..........................................Safety . 220

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 57, 277...................Manual Transmission . 200

...............Checking Fluid Level . 242.......................Reverse Lockout . 202

.......................................Shifting . 200Manual Transmission

...........................................Fluid . 242....................................Mats, Floor . 251

...............................Meters, Gauges . 63...................Methanol in Gasoline . 184

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 95...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 192

.........................................Moonroof . 94......................Closing Manually . 279

.....................................Operation . 94

Index

O

NM

L

VI

０５／０７／２８　１４：０９：０２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１５　

＊

＊

CONTINUED

.....................Outside Temperature . 65....................Overheating, Engine . 274

....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 226..........................Oxygenated Fuel . 184

...................Radiator Overheating . 274Radio/CD Sound

........................................System . 124.................Radio Theft Protection . 172

...........................Readiness Codes . 277..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 250

............................Rear Seat Access . 85

..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 88............................Rear View Mirror . 95

.................Rear Window Defogger . 72.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 82, 84

Recommended Shift........................................Speeds . 201

...Recommended Tire Pressures . 256........................................Refueling . 185

.................Reminder Indicators . 55, 56

.......................Remote Transmitter . 78Replacement Information

..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 252................Engine Oil and Filter . 233

..........................................Fuses . 280................................Light Bulbs . 246

....................................Schedule . 221......................Tires and Wheels . 258

.............................Wiper Blades . 252Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 20..........Reporting Safety Defects . 304

Reserve Tank, Engine...............................Coolant . 189, 236

...............................Restraint, Child . 32

..............Panel Brightness Control . 71........................Park Gear Position . 204

...........................................Parking . 207.................................Parking Brake . 96

Parking Brake and Brake System...............................Indicator . 58, 278

.................................Parking Lights . 69Parking Over Things that

............................................Burn . 299Passenger Airbag Off

.......................................Indicator . 29.............................PGM-FI System . 298

Playing the,..........AM/FM Radio . 126, 136, 150

......XM Saterllite Radio . 139, 153.............................CDs . 129, 141, 155...........................Tape . 134, 147, 161

..................................Pocket, Coin . 100...................................Pollen Filter . 252

..........................Power Door Locks . 77...............Power Socket Locations . 100

....................Power Steering Fluid . 245..............................Power Windows . 91

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 15........................Preparing to Drive . 198

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 16

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15..................Protecting Children . 32, 37.......................Protecting Infants . 37

.......Protecting Larger Children . 46.........Protecting Small Children . 38

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 45

.............................Using LATCH . 41

Index

IND

EX

R

P

VII

０５／０７／２８　１４：０９：０９　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１６　

＊

＊

..................Reverse Gear Position . 204...........................Reverse Lockout . 202

......................................Roof Rack . 195................................Rotation, Tire . 257

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 17.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 304

.................................Safety Features . 7.....................................Airbags . 9, 21

.................................Seat Belts . 8, 17.............Safety Labels, Location of . 51

...............................Safety Messages . ii.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 17

...............Additional Information . 17Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 19.....................................Cleaning . 251

................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 17................................Maintenance . 19

Reminder Indicator and................................Beeper . 17, 57

...................System Components . 17...............Use During Pregnancy . 15

Wearing a Lap/Shoulder.....................................Belt . 14, 17

....................................Seat Heaters . 90.................................................Seats . 82

.........................Seats, Folding Rear . 88............................Security System . 174

....................Select/Reset Knob . 63,71.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39

...............................Serial Number . 288...........................Service Intervals . 227...........................Service Manual . 305

.........Service Station Procedures . 185..........................Setting the Clock . 173

...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 203........................Shift Lock Release . 206

....................................Side Airbags . 26...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29......................Side Curtain Airbags . 28

How Your Side Curtain..........................Airbags Work . 28

...............................Signaling Turns . 69..................................Snow Chains . 259

.....................................Snow Tires . 259............Socket, Accessory Power . 100

................................Sound System . 124Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 264....................Specifications . 291, 293

............................Spark Plugs . 291, 293........................Specifications . 290, 292................................Speed Control . 175........................Speed Limiter . 202, 205

..........SRS, Additional Information . 21...Additional Safety Precautions . 31

.............................Airbag Service . 30......Airbag System Components . 21

How the Passenger Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 29

How the Side Airbags Off......................Indicator Works . 29

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 23...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 28

.............................SRS Indicator . 28, 58....START (Ignition Key Position) . 76

Index

S

VIII

０５／０７／２８　１４：０９：１４　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１７　

＊ CONTINUED

......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 250.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 263

Technical Descriptions....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 294

.....Emissions Control Systems . 297.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 184

Three Way Catalytic.......................Converter . 298, 299

.........Temperature Control, Dual . 121.......................Temperature Gauge . 64

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 123....................Temperature, Outside . 65.....................Tether Anchor Points . 45

................Theft Protection, Radio . 172Three Way Catalytic

...........................Converter . 298, 299..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 73

..........................Time, Setting the . 173....................................Timing Belt . 246....................................Tire Chains . 259

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 265...........................Tire Information . 296

...............................................Tires . 254..............................Air Pressure . 256

........................................Chains . 259.........................Checking Wear . 257..........................Compact Spare . 264

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 294......................................Inflation . 255

..................................Inspection . 256

.....................................Labeling . 296..............................Maintenance . 257

...................................Replacing . 258......................................Rotating . 257

...........................................Snow . 259....................Specifications . 291, 293

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 265Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 213................Emergency Wrecker . 285

....Equipment and Accessories . 215.............................................Tips . 217

.....................Weight Limit . 213, 214

.............................Trailer Loading . 213......................Trailer Towing Tips . 217

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,

......................Automatic . 239, 240Checking Fluid Level,

...................................Manual . 242..................Fluid Selection . 240, 241

..............Identification Number . 288.............Shifting the Automatic . 203

..................Shifting the Manual . 200

.......................Starting the Engine . 199In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 199................With a Dead Battery . 272..............State Emissions Testing . 300

........Steam Coming from Engine . 274Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 73.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 76

.......Steering Wheel Buttons . 171, 175...................Stereo Sound System . 124....................Storing Your Vehicle . 262

........................................Sun Visor . 101........................Sunglasses Holder . 102

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 30

.........................SRS Indicator . 28, 58...................System Components . 21

..................................Synthetic Oil . 233

Index

IND

EX

T

IX

０５／０７／２８　１４：０９：２０　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１８　

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊＊

...................................Treadwear . 294...................Treadwear Indicators . 257

.......................................Trip Meter . 64................................................Trunk . 81

..................................Cargo Net . 196....................Emergency Opener . 81

.........................................Hooks . 196.................................Opening the . 81

.............Open Monitor Indicator . 61....................................Turn Signals . 69

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii................Warning Button, Hazard . 71

.........Warning Labels, Location of . 51....................Warranty Coverages . 303

Washer, Windshield........Checking the Fluid Level . 238

........................Level Indicator . 60.....................................Operation . 68

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 73............Alignment and Balance . 257

..........................Compact Spare . 264

...............................Nut Wrench . 266...................................Replacing . 258

Windows...............................Auto Reverse . 92

..................Operating the Power . 91...........................Rear, Defogger . 72

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 68...................Defroster . 111, 115, 120

.......................................Washers . 68Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 252.....................................Operation . 68

....................................Worn Tires . 257.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 285

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 263

..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 294........................Unleaded Gasoline . 184

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 235......................Using a Booster Seat . 47

................................Vanity Mirror . 101.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 194

.............Vehicle Dimensions . 290, 292....Vehicle Identification Number . 288

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)...................................System . 211

........VSA System Indicator . 62, 211...VSA Activation Indicator . 62, 211

.........................VSA Off Switch . 212.............................Vehicle Storage . 262

.....................................Ventilation . 110.................................................VIN . 288

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 233...........Voice Control System . 117, 149

: U.S. only: Canada only

Index

V

WU

X

０５／０７／２８　１４：０９：２８　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３１９　

5-speed manual transmission:

6-speed manual transmission:

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Manual Transmission Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:Spare Tire Pressure:

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).

Capacity:

2.0 US qt (1.9 )

2.3 US qt (2.2 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )Rear:30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )Front:

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

All V6 models

232

240 241

242 243

245

244

Canadian 4-cylinder LX

All 4-cylinder models exceptCanadian LX

０５／０７／２８　１４：０９：５２　３１ＳＤＰ６３０　０３２０　

2006 accord coupe online reference owner's...

Documents